Denon AVR X1300W Manual

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
.
AVR-X1300W
INTEGRATED NETWORK AV RECEIVER
Owner’s Manual
Front panel Display Rear panel 1 Remote Index

Accessories 7 Connecting a playback device 51

Inserting the batteries 8 Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) 52
Operating range of the remote control unit 8 Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player 53
Features 9 Connecting a video camcorder or game console 54
High quality sound 9 Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port 55
High performance 9 Connecting an FM/AM antenna 57
Easy operation 12 Connecting to a home network (LAN) 59
Part names and functions 13 Wired LAN 59
Front panel 13 Wireless LAN 60
Display 16 Connecting an external control device 61
Rear panel 18 REMOTE CONTROL jacks 61
Remote control unit 21 Connecting the power cord 62
Connections Playback
Connecting speakers 25 Basic operation 64
Speaker installation 25 Turning the power on 64
Speaker connection 32 Selecting the input source 64
Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings 36 Adjusting the volume 65
Connecting a TV 47 Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) 65
Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player 65
compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) 48
Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and
incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) 49
Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector 50

Playing an iPod 66 Listening to Internet Radio 87

Listening to music on an iPod 67 Listening to Internet Radio 88
iPod Browse Mode settings 68 Playing the last played Internet Radio station 89
Performing repeat playback 70 Using vTuner to add Internet Radio stations to favorites 90
Performing random playback 70 Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS 91
Playing a USB memory device 71 Applying media sharing settings 92
Playing files stored on USB memory devices 72 Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS 93
Listening to music on a Bluetooth device 74 Listening to Pandora® 95
Playing music from Bluetooth device 75 Listening to Pandora® 96
Pairing with other Bluetooth devices 77 Creating a new station 98
Reconnecting to this unit from a Bluetooth device 78 Listening to an existing station 99
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts 79 Listening to created radio stations at random 99
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts 80 Giving feedback and managing stations 100
Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune) 81 Sign Out 101
Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode) 82 Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio 102
Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio 103
Preset) 82 Sign Out 104
Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory) 83
Listening to preset stations 83
Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name) 84
Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip) 85
Cancelling Preset Skip 86

AirPlay function 105 Selecting a sound mode 119

Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad 106 Selecting a sound mode 120
Playing iTunes music with this unit 106 Direct playback 121
Selecting multiple speakers (devices) 107 Pure Direct playback 121
Perform iTunes playback operations with the remote control unit Auto surround playback 122
of this unit 107 HDMI control function 131
Spotify Connect function 108 Setting procedure 131
Playing Spotify music with this unit 108 Smart Menu function 132
Convenience functions 109 Sleep timer function 134
Performing repeat playback 110 Using the sleep timer 135
Performing random playback 110 Quick select plus function 136
Registering to Favorites (Save to Favorite) 111 Calling up the settings 137
Playing back content added to “Favorites” 111 Changing the settings 138
Deleting content added to favorites 112 Web control function 139
Searching content with keywords (Text Search) 112 Controlling the unit from a web control 139
Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time 141
Playback in ZONE2 (Separate room)
(Slideshow) 113
Connecting ZONE2 141
Setting the Slideshow Interval 114
Playback in ZONE2 143
Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Ch Level Adjust) 115
Adjusting the tone (Tone) 116
Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select) 117
Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo) 118

Settings Inputs 170

Input Assign 170
Menu map 145 Source Rename 172
Menu operations 148 Hide Sources 172
Inputting characters 149 Source Level 172
Using the keyboard screen 150 Input Select 173
Audio 151 Speakers 174
Dialog Level 151 174
Audyssey® Setup
Subwoofer Level 151 176
Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey® Setup)
Surr.Parameter 152 183
Error messages
Restorer 156 184
Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings
Audio Delay 157 185
Manual Setup
Volume 157 185
Amp Assign
Audyssey® 158 186
Speaker Config.
Manual EQ 161 191
Distances
Video 163 192
Levels
HDMI Setup 163 193
Crossovers
On Screen Disp. 168 194
Bass
TV Format 169 195
Front Speaker

Network 196 Tips

Information 196
Connection 196 Tips 215
Wi-Fi Setup 197 Troubleshooting 217
Settings 200 Resetting factory settings 233
Network Control 202
202
Appendix
Friendly Name
Diagnostics 203 About HDMI 234
General 204 Playing back a USB memory devices 237
Language 204 Playing back a Bluetooth device 238
ECO 204 Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS 239
ZONE2 Setup 207 Playing back Internet Radio 240
Zone Rename 208 Personal memory plus function 240
Quick Sel.Names 208 Last function memory 240
Front Display 208 Sound modes and channel output 241
Firmware 209 Sound modes and surround parameters 242
Information 211 Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes 245
Usage Data 213 Explanation of terms 248
Setup Lock 213 Trademark information 257
Specifications 259
Index 264
License 267

Thank you for purchasing this Denon product.

To ensure proper operation, please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the product.
After reading this manual, be sure to keep it for future reference.
Accessories
Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.
.
Quick Start Guide Safety Instructions Notes on radio Warranty Cable labels
(for North America
model only)
Power cord FM indoor antenna AM loop antenna Sound calibration Sound calibration
microphone microphone stand
Remote control unit R03/AAA batteries

Inserting the batteries NOTE

0 To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
1
0 Do not use a new battery together with an old one.
Remove the rear lid in the direction of the arrow and 0 Do not use two different types of batteries.
remove it. 0 Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long
periods.
0 If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery
compartment and insert new batteries.
Operating range of the remote control

unit
.
Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.
2 Insert two batteries correctly into the battery
compartment as indicated.
Batteries
Approx. 23 ft/7 m
30° 30°
.
3 Put the rear cover back on.
.
Features
High quality sound High performance
0 With discrete circuit technology, the power amplifier provides 0 4K 60Hz input/output supported
identical quality for all 7-channels (120 Watts x 7-channels)
For optimum realism and stunning dynamic range, the power amplifier
section features discrete power devices (not integrated circuitry).
By using high current, high power discrete power devices, the amplifier
is able to easily drive high quality speakers.
0 Dolby Atmos (v p. 248)
This unit is equipped with a decoder that supports Dolby Atmos audio
format. The placement or movement of sound is accurately reproduced
.
When 4K Ultra HD (High Definition) is used, an input/output speed of 60
by the addition of overhead speakers, enabling you to experience an frames per second (60p) is achieved for video signals. When connected
incredibly natural and realistic surround sound field. to 4K Ultra HD and 60p video signal input compatible TV, you can enjoy
0 DTS:X the sense of realism only available from high-definition images, even
This unit is equipped with the DTS:X decoder technology. DTS:X when viewing fast-moving video.
brings the home theater experience to new heights with its immersive This unit also supports image processing for 4K 60p, 4:4:4 and 24-bit
object based audio technology which removes the bounds of channels. videos. By processing the video at the original resolution, this unit lets
The flexibility of objects allows for sound to be scaled large or small you enjoy flawless, high-definition picture quality.
and moved around the room with greater accuracy than ever before 0 HDCP 2.2
leading to a richer immersive audio experience. This unit is compatible with HDCP 2.2 copyright protection standard.

0 HDMI connections enable connection to various digital AV 0 The device is equipped with a AirPlay® function in addition to
devices (6 inputs, 1 output) network functions such as Internet radio etc. (v p. 105)
6 1
In Out
.
.
This unit is equipped with 6 HDMI inputs and 1 HDMI output enabling You can enjoy a wide variety of content, including listening to Internet
connection to various HDMI compatible devices such as Blu-ray Disc Radio, playing audio files stored on your PC, and displaying
players, game consoles and HD video camcorders. photographs stored on your PC on our television.
This unit also supports Apple AirPlay which lets you stream your music
library from an iPhone®, iPad®, iPod touch® or iTunes®.
0 Playback of DSD and FLAC files via USB and networks
This unit supports the playback of high resolution audio formats such as
DSD (5.6 MHz) and FLAC 192 kHz files. It provides high quality
playback of high resolution files.

0 Wireless connection with Bluetooth devices can be carried out 0 Compatible with the “Denon 2016 AVR Remote App”z for
easily (v p. 74) performing basic operations of the unit with an iPad, iPhone or
Android™ devices (Google, Amazon Kindle Fire)
“Denon 2016 AVR Remote App” is application software that allows you
to perform basic operations with an iPad, iPhone, Android smartphone
or Android tablet such as turning the unit ON/OFF, controlling the
volume, and switching the source.
z Download the appropriate “Denon 2016 AVR Remote App” for your iOS or
Android devices. This unit needs to be connected to the same LAN or Wi-Fi
(wireless LAN) network that the iPhone or iPod touch is connected to.
.
You can enjoy music simply by connecting wirelessly with your
smartphone, tablet, PC, etc.

0 Multi-Room audio (v p. 118)

Easy operation
GMAIN ZONEH GZONE2H
0 “Setup Assistant” provides easy-to-follow setup instructions
First select the language when prompted. Then simply follow the
instructions displayed on the TV screen to set up the speakers, network,
etc.
0 Easy to use Graphical User Interface
This unit is equipped with a Graphical User Interface for improved
operability.
.
You can select and play back the respective inputs in MAIN ZONE and
ZONE2.
In addition, when the All Zone Stereo function is used, the music being
played back in MAIN ZONE can be enjoyed in all the zones at the same
time. This is useful when you want to let the BGM propagate throughout
the whole house.
0 Energy-saving design
This unit is equipped with an ECO Mode function that allows you to
enjoy music and movies while reducing the power consumption during
use, and also an auto-standby function that automatically turns off the
power supply when the unit is not in use. This helps reduce
unnecessary power use.

Part names and functions

Front panel
q w e r t y
u i o Q0 Q1 Q2
Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6
.
For details, see the next page.

qw e r t y C SOURCE SELECT knob

This selects the input source. (v p. 64)
D Remote control sensor
This receives signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 8)
E Display
u i o Q0 Q1 This displays various pieces of information. (v p. 16)
F MASTER VOLUME knob
This adjusts the volume level. (v p. 65)
G Tuner preset channel buttons
(TUNER PRESET CH +, –)
.
A Power operation button (X) These select preset broadcast stations. (v p. 83)
Used to turn the power of the MAIN ZONE (room where this unit is H ZONE2 ON/OFF button
located) on/off (standby). (v p. 64) This turns the power of ZONE2 (separate room) on/off. (v p. 143)
B Power indicator I ZONE2 SOURCE button
This is lit as follows according to the power status: This selects the input source for ZONE2. (v p. 143)
0 White: Power on J DIMMER button
0 Off: Normal standby Each press of this switches the brightness of the display. (v p. 208)
0 Red:
K STATUS button
0 When “HDMI Control” is set to “On” (v p. 165) Each press of this switches the status information that is shown on the
0 When “HDMI PassThrough” is set to “On” (v p. 164) display.
0 When “Network Control” is set to “Always On” (v p. 202)

N AUX-HDMI connector
This is used to connect HDMI output compatible devices such as video
camcorders and game consoles. (v p. 54)
O USB port (T)
This is used to connect USB storages (such as USB memory devices)
Q2 and the USB cable supplied with iPod. (v p. 55)
P SETUP MIC jack
This is used to connect the supplied Sound calibration microphone.
(v p. 177)
Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6
.
L QUICK SELECT buttons
With a single press of any of these buttons, you can call up various
settings you’ve registered to each button such as the input source,
volume level and sound mode settings. (v p. 136)
M Headphones jack (PHONES)
This is used to connect headphones.
When the headphones are plugged into this jack, audio will no longer
be output from the connected speakers or from the SUBWOOFER
connectors.
NOTE
0 To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively when using
headphones.

Display
q w e r t y u i o
Q0 Q1 Q2
.
A Input mode indicators E Tuner reception mode indicators
These light according to the audio input mode settings of each input These light up according to the reception conditions when the input
source. (v p. 173) source is set to “Tuner”.
B Surround back indicator TUNED: Lights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in.
This lights when audio signals are being output from the surround back STEREO: Lights up when receiving FM stereo broadcasts.
speakers. (v p. 188) F Sleep timer indicator
C Decoder indicators This lights when the sleep mode is selected. (v p. 134)
These light when Dolby or DTS signals are input or when the Dolby or G Circle indicator
DTS decoder is running. This is displayed when the input source is “Online Music” or “iPod/USB”
D Audyssey® indicator when you are playing back music.
This lights when “MultEQ® XT”, “Dynamic EQ” or “Dynamic Volume”
has been set up. (v p. 158)

i o
Q0 Q1 Q2
.
H Volume indicator
I MUTE indicator
This blinks while the sound is muted. (v p. 65)
J Information display
The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other
information are displayed here.
K Input signal indicators
The respective indicator will light corresponding to the input signal.
L ZONE2 indicator
This lights up when ZONE2 (separate room) power is turned on.
(v p. 143)

Rear panel
q w e w r t y u i q
o Q0 Q1
.
For details, see the next page.

0 The antenna clip can be removed from the rear panel.

q w ew r t q A Rotate the antenna clip 90 degrees to the left.
B Pull the antenna clip out towards yourself.
0 The antenna clip is needed when transporting this unit. Keep it in a
safe place.
0 Attach the antenna clip by following the steps for removing it in
reverse.
B PRE OUT connectors

Used to connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or power amplifier
for ZONE2.
0 “Connecting the subwoofer” (v p. 33)
.
0 “Connection 2 : Connection using an external amplifier
A Rod antennas for Bluetooth/wireless LAN (ZONE2)” (v p. 142)
Stand this antenna upright when connecting to a network via wireless C Analog audio connectors (AUDIO)
LAN, or when connecting to a handheld device via Bluetooth.
Used to connect devices equipped with analog audio connectors.
(v p. 60)
(v p. 52)
90° D Digital audio connectors (DIGITAL AUDIO)
90° Used to connect devices equipped with digital audio connectors.
320° 0 “Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and
320° incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel)” (v p. 49)
0 “Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI
connector” (v p. 50)
0 “Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)” (v p. 52)
E NETWORK connector
Used to connect to a LAN cable when connecting to a wired LAN
network. (v p. 59)
.
G Video connectors (VIDEO)

Used to connect devices equipped with video connectors.
y u i 0 “Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI
connector” (v p. 50)
H AC inlet (AC IN)
Used to connect the power cord. (v p. 62)
I FM/AM antenna terminals (ANTENNA)
Used to connect FM antennas and AM loop antennas. (v p. 57)
J Speaker terminals (SPEAKERS)
Used to connect speakers. (v p. 32)
K REMOTE CONTROL jack
o Q0 Q1 Used to connect infrared receivers/transmitters in order to operate this
.
unit and external devices from a different room. (v p. 61)
F HDMI connectors NOTE
Used to connect devices equipped with HDMI connectors.
0 Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel. Electrostatic
0 “Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.
compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel)” (v p. 48)
0 “Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and
incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel)” (v p. 49)
0 “Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player” (v p. 53)

Remote control unit

A ZONE2 ON/OFF button (ZONE2 X)
This turns the power of ZONE2 (separate room) on/off. (v p. 143)
B ZONE2 VOLUME buttons (df)
q ZONE 2
ZO
ECO
POWER
PO
This setting adjusts the volume level for ZONE2. (v p. 144)
w SOU
OURC
RCE
VOLU
LUME
SLE
LEEP
C ZONE2 SOURCE button
e CBL/SAT
BL/SAT
DVD/
VD/
Blu-ra
Blu-ray Blu-r
Bl -ray
This selects the input source for ZONE2. (v p. 143)
D Input source select buttons
MED
EDIA
GAME
GA AUX PLAY
PLAYER CHA
HANN
NNEL
r iPod/
iPod/USB TV AUDI
A DIO TUN
UNER These selects the input source. (v p. 64)
ONLIN
ONLINE
MUSIC luetoo
Bluetooth
INTERNET
INTERNET
RADI
ADIO AGE
PAG E SOUND MODE buttons
These select the sound mode. (v p. 119)
F Information button (INFO)
OUND
SOUND MO
MODE
t
MOVIE MUSIC GAME PURE
This displays the status information on the TV screen. (v p. 212)

INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION
y G Cursor buttons (uio p)

These select items.
u ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
H ENTER button
i
BACK SETUP
SET This determines the selection.
TUN
UNE TUNE
TU MUTE
QUICK
K SE
SELECT
1 2 3 4

I BACK button
This returns to the previous screen.
Q2 J System buttons
Q3 These perform playback related operations.
Tuning up / Tuning down buttons (TUNE +, –)
Q4
ZONE 2
ZO POWER
PO
ECO
SOU
OURC
RCE
VOLU
LUME
SLE
LEEP
These select either FM broadcast or AM broadcast. (v p. 80)
CBL/SAT
BL/SAT
DVD/
VD/
Blu-ra
Blu-ray Blu-r
Bl -ray Q5 K QUICK SELECT buttons (1 – 4)
GAME
GA AUX
MED
EDIA
CHA
HANN
NNEL
These call up settings registered to each button, such as input source,
volume level and sound mode settings. (v p. 136)
PLAYER
PLAY
L Remote control signal transmitter

iPod/
iPod/USB TV A
AUDI
DIO TUN
UNER
This transmits signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 8)

ONLIN
ONLINE INTERNET
INTERNET
MUSIC Blu
luetoo
etooth RADI
ADIO AGE
PAG
OUND
SOUND MO
MODE
M ECO Mode button
This switches to ECO Mode. (v p. 204)
INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION N POWER button (X)
This turns the power on/off. (v p. 64)
ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
O SLEEP button
This sets the sleep timer. (v p. 134)
o BACK SETUP
SET
Q0
TUN
UNE TUNE
TU MUTE
QUICK
K SE
SELECT
Q1 1 2 3 4

P Channel select buttons (CHANNEL +, –)

These select preset broadcast stations. (v p. 83)
Q Page search buttons (PAGE df)
These switch pages.
R OPTION button
ZONE 2
ZO POWER
PO
ECO
SOU
OURC
RCE
VOLU
LUME
SLE
LEEP
This displays the option menu on the TV screen.
S VOLUME buttons (df)
DVD/
VD/
CBL/SAT
BL/SAT Blu-ra
Blu-ray Blu-r
Bl -ray
GAME
GA AUX
MED
EDIA
PLAY
PLAYER CHA
HANN
NNEL
Q6 These adjusts the volume level.
0 “Adjusting the volume” (v p. 65)
iPod/
iPod/USB TV AUDI
A DIO TUN
UNER
T SETUP button
ONLIN
ONLINE
MUSIC Blu
luetoo
INTERNET
INTERNET
etooth RADI
ADIO AGE
PAG
Q7 This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v p. 148)
MOVIE
OUND
SOUND MO
MUSIC
MODE
GAME PURE
U MUTE button (:)
This mutes the output audio. (v p. 65)
INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION
Q8
ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
Q9
BACK
TUN
UNE
SETUP
SET
TUNE
TU MUTE
W0
W1
QUICK
K SE
SELECT
1 2 3 4

o Contents o Cables used for connections

Connecting speakers 25 Provide necessary cables according to the devices you want to
connect.
Connecting a TV 47
Connecting a playback device 51
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port 55 Speaker cable
Connecting an FM/AM antenna 57
.
Connecting to a home network (LAN) 59 Subwoofer cable
Connecting an external control device 61
.
Connecting the power cord 62 HDMI cable
.
NOTE Video cable
.
0 Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.
However, when the “Setup Assistant” is running, follow the instructions in the Coaxial digital cable
“Setup Assistant” (page 8 in the separate “Quick Start Guide”) screen for making
.
connections. (During “Setup Assistant” operation, the input/output connectors do
not conduct current.) Optical cable
0 Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in
.
noise.
L L
Audio cable
R R
.
LAN cable
.
Connecting speakers
Install speakers and connect them to this unit. (“Speaker installation” (v p. 25), “Speaker connection” (v p. 32))
Speaker installation
Determine the speaker system depending on the number of speakers you
are using and install each speaker and subwoofer in the room. Place the FRONT left and right speakers an
FL/FR
Speaker installation is explained using this example of a typical equal distance from the main listening position.
(Front speaker left/
installation. The distance between each speaker and your TV
right):
should also be the same.
C Place the CENTER speaker in between the front
(Center speaker): speakers and above or below your TV.
Place the SURROUND left and right speakers an
SL/SR equal distance to the left and right sides of the
FL FR (Surround speaker left/ main listening position. If you don’t have
SL C SW2 SR right): surround back speakers, move the surround
speakers slightly behind your listening position.
SW1
Place the SURROUND BACK left and right
speakers an equal distance from the main
SBL/SBR
SBL SB SBR listening position and directly behind the main
(Surround back
listening position. When using a single surround
speaker left/right):
.
back speaker (SB), place it directly behind the
listening position.
Place the SUBWOOFER at a convenient location
SW 1/2 near the front speakers. If you have two
(Subwoofer): subwoofers, place them asymmetrically across
the front of your room.

Place the FRONT HEIGHT left and right speakers

FHL/FHR
TML TMR directly above the front speakers. Mount them as
TFL TFR (Front height speaker
close to the ceiling as possible and aim them
FHL FHR left/right):
towards the main listening position.
Mount the TOP FRONT left and right speakers on
TFL/TFR
the ceiling slightly in front of your main listening
(Top front speaker
position and aligned with the left and right front
left/right):
speakers.
TML/TMR Mount the TOP MIDDLE left and right speakers
(Top middle speaker directly above the main listening position and
left/right): aligned with the left and right front speakers.
.
About Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers reflect the sound off the ceiling to allow
the sound to come from over your head by using a special upward-
pointing speaker that is placed on the floor.
You can enjoy the Dolby Atmos 3D sound even in an environment where
FDL FDR speakers cannot be installed on the ceiling.
SDL SDR
.
Place the FRONT Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker
FDL/FDR on the front speaker. For a Dolby Atmos Enabled
(Front Dolby speaker integrated with a front speaker, place the Dolby
left/right): Atmos Enabled speaker instead of the front
speaker.
Place the SURROUND Dolby Atmos Enabled
.
SDL/SDR speaker on the surround speaker. For a Dolby
(Surround Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker integrated with a surround
speaker left/right): speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker
instead of the surround speaker.

Height speakers layout

0 This unit is compatible with Dolby Atmos and DTS:X which offers an even wider FHL FHR
and deeper surround sensation.
0 Dolby Atmos is not supported in a 5.1ch or less speaker configuration.
0 DTS:X can be selected regardless of the speaker configuration. FL FR
0 Use the illustration below as a guide for how high each speaker should be TFL C TFR
installed. The height does not need to be exactly the same.
Top middle speaker TML TMR

Top front speaker SL SR
Front height
speaker
Point slightly Surround
z3 speaker
downwards 2
z GViewed from the topH
Surround
z1
.
back
speaker
Front speaker
GViewed from the sideH
z1: 30° – 45° z2: 30° – 55° z3: 65° – 100°
.
o When 7.1-channel speakers are installed using o When 5.1-channel speakers are installed
surround back speakers
FL FR
FL FR
SW C z1
SW C z2
z1
z2 z3 SL SR
SL SR
.
Listening z1: 22° - 30° z2: 120°
SBL position SBR
.
z1: 22° - 30° z2: 90° - 110° z3: 135° - 150°
0 When using a single surround back speaker, place it directly behind the listening
position.

o Layout including height speakers and ceiling n Ceiling speaker layout example
speakers Combination of 5.1-channel layout and top middle speakers.
n Height speaker layout example TML TMR

Combination of 5.1-channel layout and front height speakers.
FL FR
SL SW C SR
FHL FHR
FL FR
SL SW C SR
.
.
n Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker layout example

Combination of 5.1-channel layout and front Dolby speakers.
FDL FDR
SL FL SW C FR SR
.
Speaker connection NOTE

0 Carry out the following settings when using a speaker with an impedance of 4 – 6
Here we connect the speakers in the room to this unit. Ω/ohms.
This section explains how to connect them using typical examples. 1. Press and hold the main unit’s ZONE2 SOURCE and STATUS at the same
time for at least 3 seconds.
NOTE “V.Format:< NTSC>” appears on the display.
2. Press DIMMER on the main unit twice.
0 Disconnect this unit’s power plug from the power outlet before connecting the
speakers. Also, turn off the subwoofer. “Sp.Imp.:<8ohms>” appears on the display.
0 Connect so that the speaker cable core wires do not protrude from the speaker 3. Press TUNER PRESET CH + or TUNER PRESET CH － on the main unit to
terminal. The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear select the impedance.
panel or if the + and - sides touch each other. (“Protection circuit” (v p. 256))
Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers is
0 Never touch the speaker terminals while the power cord is connected. Doing so 6ohms:
could result in electric shock. When the “Setup Assistant” (page 8 in the separate 6 Ω/ohms.
“Quick Start Guide”) is running, follow the instructions in the “Setup Assistant” Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers is
screen for making connections. (Power is not supplied to the speaker terminals 4ohms:
4 Ω/ohms.
while the “Setup Assistant” is running.)
0 Use speakers with an impedance of 4 – 16 Ω/ohms. 4. Press the main unit’s STATUS to complete the setting.

o Connecting the speaker cables o Connecting the subwoofer

Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and – Use a subwoofer cable to connect the subwoofer. Two subwoofers can
(black) polarities on the speakers being connected to this unit, and be be connected to this unit.
sure to connect the channels and polarities correctly. The same signal is output from the respective subwoofer terminals.
1 Peel off about 3/8 inch (10 mm) of sheathing from the
tip of the speaker cable, then either twist the core wire
tightly or terminate it.
.
2 Turn the speaker terminal counterclockwise to loosen it.
.
3 Insert the speaker cable’s core wire to the hilt into the
speaker terminal.
SW1 SW2
.
.
4 Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to tighten it.
.
o About the cable label (supplied) for channel Speaker Color

identification FRONT L White
FRONT R Red
The channel display section for speaker terminals on the rear panel is
color-coded for each channel to be identifiable. CENTER Green
Attach the cable label corresponding to each speaker to each speaker SURROUND L Light blue
cable. SURROUND R Blue
This makes it easy to connect the correct cable to the speaker SURROUND BACK L Beige
terminals on the rear panel. SURROUND BACK R Brown
FRONT HEIGHT L Beige
FRONT HEIGHT R Brown
ZONE2 L Beige
ZONE2 R Brown
TOP FRONT L Beige
TOP FRONT R Brown
TOP MIDDLE L Beige
TOP MIDDLE R Brown
FRONT DOLBY L Beige
FRONT DOLBY R Brown
SURROUND DOLBY L Beige
SURROUND DOLBY R Brown
SUBWOOFER Black

Attach the cable label for each channel to its speaker cable as shown
in the diagram.
Refer to the table and attach the label to each speaker cable.
Then, make connection so that the color of the speaker terminal
matches that of the cable label.
G How to attach the cable label H
Speaker
This unit
.
Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings

This unit has a built-in 7-channel power amplifier. In addition to the basic 5.1-channel system, a variety of speaker systems can be configured by changing
the “Amp Assign” settings to suit the application, such as 7.1-channel systems, bi-amp connections and 2-channel systems for multi-zone playback.
(v p. 185)
Perform “Amp Assign” settings to suit the number of rooms and speaker configuration to be installed. (v p. 185)
Playback speaker and zone Connection
“Amp Assign” settings
MAIN ZONE ZONE2 page
5.1-channel 2-channel (Pre-out) Can be set in all “Amp Assign” modes. 37
7.1-channel (surround back) 2-channel (Pre-out) Surround Back 38
7.1-channel (front height) 2-channel (Pre-out) Front Height 39
7.1-channel (top front) 2-channel (Pre-out) Top Front 40
7.1-channel (top middle) 2-channel (Pre-out) Top Middle 41
7.1-channel (front Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker) 2-channel (Pre-out) Front Dolby 42
7.1-channel (surround Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker) 2-channel (Pre-out) Surround Dolby 43
5.1-channel (bi-amp connection for front speaker) 2-channel (Pre-out) Bi-Amp 44
5.1-channel + second pair of front speaker 2-channel (Pre-out) Front B 45
2-channel
5.1-channel ZONE2 (Default) 46
(Speaker out)
0 The sound mode that can be selected varies according to the speaker configuration. See “Relationship between sound modes and channel output” (v p. 241) for the
sound modes that are supported.

o 5.1-channel playback
This serves as a basic 5.1-channel surround system.
FL FR
SW C
SL SR
.
SW FR FL C SR SL
.
o 7.1-channel playback
System for 7.1-channel surround playback.
n Example connections when using surround back speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with surround back speakers.
FL FR
SW C
SL SR
SBL SBR
.
0 Set “Assign Mode” to “Surround Back” in the menu. (v p. 185) SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL
.
0 When using a single surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK
L terminal.

n Example connections when using front height speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with front height speakers.
FHL FHR
FL FR
SW C
SL SR
.
0 Set “Assign Mode” to “Front Height” in the menu. (v p. 185)
SW FR FL C SR SL FHR FHL
.
n Example connections when using top front speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with top front speakers.
TFL TFR
FL FR
SL SW C SR
.
0 Set “Assign Mode” to “Top Front” in the menu. (v p. 185)
SW FR FL C SR SL TFR TFL
.
n Example connections when using top middle speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with top middle speakers.
TML TMR
FL FR
SL SW C SR
.
0 Set “Assign Mode” to “Top Middle” in the menu. (v p. 185)
SW FR FL C SR SL TMR TML
.
n Example connections when using front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.
FDL FDR
SL FL SW C FR SR
.
0 Set “Assign Mode” to “Front Dolby” in the menu. (v p. 185)
SW FR FL C SR SL FDR FDL
.
n Example connections when using surround Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with surround Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.
FL FR
SDL SDR
SW C
SL SR
.
0 Set “Assign Mode” to “Surround Dolby” in the menu. (v p. 185)
SW FR FL C SR SL SDR SDL
.
o 5.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speaker)

This system plays back 5.1-channels. You can use the bi-amp connection for front speakers. Bi-amp connection is a method to connect separate
amplifiers to the tweeter terminal and woofer terminal of a speaker that supports bi-amplification. This connection enables back EMF (power returned
without being output) from the woofer to flow into the tweeter without affecting the sound quality, producing a higher sound quality.
FL FR
(Bi-Amp) (Bi-Amp)
SW C
SL SR
.
0 Set “Assign Mode” to “Bi-Amp” in the menu. (v p. 186)
SW C SR SL
NOTE
0 When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting plate or
wire between the speaker’s woofer and tweeter terminals. (R) (L)
q w q w
FR FL
.
o 5.1-channel playback + second pair of front speaker

This system enables switching playback between front speakers A and B as desired.
FL FL FR FR
(B) (A) (A) (B)
SW C
SL SR
.
0 Set “Assign Mode” to “Front B” in the menu. (v p. 186)
SW FR (A) FL (A) C SR SL FR (B) FL (B)
.
o 5.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2)

This connection method constructs a 5.1-channel speaker system in the MAIN ZONE and a 2-channel system in ZONE2.
MAIN ZONE
FL FR
SW C
SL SR
.
ZONE2
SW FR FL C SR SL ZONE2 ZONE2
R L
.
ZONE2 ZONE2
L R
0 Set “Assign Mode” to “ZONE2” in the menu. (v p. 186)
.
Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to this unit so that the input video is output to the TV. You can also enjoy audio from the TV on this unit.
How to connect a TV depends on the connectors and functions equipped on the TV.
ARC (Audio Return Channel) function plays TV audio on this unit by sending the TV audio signal to this unit via HDMI cable.
Is the TV equipped with an HDMI connector?
Yes
Is the TV compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) ?
Yes No No
.
“Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI “Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI “Connection 3 : TV equipped without
connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio an HDMI connector” (v p. 50)
Return Channel)” (v p. 48) Return Channel)” (v p. 49)

Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC
(Audio Return Channel)
Use an HDMI cable to connect a TV that is compatible with the ARC function to this unit.
Set “HDMI Control” to “On” when using a TV that supports the ARC function. (v p. 165)
TV
HDMI
IN
(ARC)
.
Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC
(Audio Return Channel)
Use an HDMI cable to connect the TV to this unit.
To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.
TV
OUT IN
OPTICAL HDMI
OUT IN
.
Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector

Use a video cable to connect the TV to this unit.
To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.
TV
OUT IN
OPTICAL VIDEO
OUT IN
.
Connecting a playback device

This unit is equipped with two types of video input connectors (HDMI and composite video) and three types of audio input connectors (HDMI, digital audio
and audio).
Select input connectors on this unit according to the connectors equipped on the device you want to connect.
If the device connected to this unit is equipped with an HDMI connector, it is recommended to use HDMI connections.
In the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable.

0 “Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player” (v p. 53)
0 “Connecting a video camcorder or game console” (v p. 54)
0 Connect devices to this unit as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit.
0 The source that is assigned to the HDMI IN, DIGITAL AUDIO IN, VIDEO IN and AUDIO IN connectors can be changed. See “Input Assign” on how to change the input source
assigned to the input connectors. (v p. 170)
0 To play back audio signals that are input to this unit on a TV connected via HDMI, set in the menu “HDMI Audio Out” to “TV”. (v p. 163)
0 To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2, use a playback device and TV compatible with HDCP 2.2 only.

Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)

This explanation uses the connection with a satellite tuner/cable TV STB as an example.
Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.
(HDMI incompatible device)
Satellite tuner/ Satellite tuner/
Cable TV Cable TV
AUDIO VIDEO
AUDIO COAXIAL VIDEO
OUT OUT OUT HDMI
R L OUT
R L
or
R L
.
Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player

This explanation uses the connection with a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player as an example.
DVD player/
Blu-ray Disc
player
HDMI
OUT
.
Connecting a video camcorder or game console

This explanation uses the connection with a video camcorders as an example.
Connect a playback device to this unit, such as a video camcorder or game console.
Video camcorder
HDMI
OUT
.
0 The 4K 60/50Hz video signal cannot be input to this connection using a format other than YCbCr 4:2:0. If your playback device does not support YCbCr 4:2:0 for the 4K
60/50Hz output format, use an HDMI connector on the rear panel.

Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port

To connect an iPod to this unit, use the USB adapter cable that was supplied with the iPod.
For operating instructions see “Playing an iPod” (v p. 66) or “Playing a USB memory device” (v p. 71).
iPod
USB memory
device
or
.
0 Denon does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a portable USB hard disk drive (HDD) which came with an AC adapter,
use that device’s supplied AC adapter.
NOTE
0 USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
0 It is not possible to use this unit by connecting the unit’s USB port to a PC via a USB cable.
0 Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference with other devices.

o Supported iPod/iPhone models

• iPod classic
• iPod nano
• iPod touch
• iPhone
.
Connecting an FM/AM antenna

Connect the antenna, tune in to a broadcast and then move the antenna to
AM loop antenna
the location where there is least noise. Then use tape, etc. to fix the (supplied)
antenna in this location. (“Listening to FM/AM broadcasts” (v p. 79))
0 If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend installing an

outdoor antenna. For details, inquire at the retail store where you purchased the
unit.
q w e
NOTE
0 Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the
panel.
FM indoor antenna
(supplied)
White
Black
.
o Using the AM loop antenna o AM loop antenna assembly
1
Suspending on a wall
Put the stand section through the bottom of the loop
Suspend directly on a wall without assembling.
antenna from the rear and bend it forward.
2 Insert the projecting part into the square hole in the

stand.
Stand
Nail, tack, etc.
Square hole
.
Standing alone
Loop antenna
Use the procedure shown above to assemble. Projecting part
When assembling, refer to “AM loop antenna assembly”.
.
.
Connecting to a home network (LAN)

This unit can connect to a network using a wired LAN or wireless LAN.
You can connect this unit to your home network (LAN) to enable various Wired LAN
types of playback and operations as described below. To make connections via wired LAN, use a LAN cable to connect the
0 Playback of network audio such as Internet Radio and from your media router to this unit as shown in the figure below.
server(s)
0 Using the Apple AirPlay function
NAS
PC (Network Attached Storage)
0 Operation on this unit via the network
0 Firmware Update Modem
Internet
For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service
Provider) or a computer shop.
To WAN side
To LAN port
To LAN port LAN port/ Ethernet LAN port/ Ethernet
connector connector
Router
.
Wireless LAN
0 When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped with the following
When connecting to a wireless LAN network, stand the rod antenna for functions:
Bluetooth/wireless LAN connection upright on the rear panel.
0 Built-in DHCP server
See “Wi-Fi Setup” on how to connect to a wireless LAN router. This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
(v p. 197) 0 Built-in 100BASE-TX switch
When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching hub with a
Internet
speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
Modem
0 Only use a shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable (readily available at electronics
stores). (CAT-5 or greater recommended)
0 The normal shielded-type LAN cable is recommended.
If a flat-type cable or unshielded-type cable is used, other devices could be
affected by noise.
To WAN side 0 When using a router that supports the WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) function, Wi-
Fi connection can be carried out easily.
0 When using this unit connected to a network with no DHCP function, configure the
IP address, etc. in “Network”. (v p. 196)
NOTE
Router with access point 0 The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact your ISP or a
computer shop for details.
0 This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE compatible router is required if
your contracted line is not set using PPPoE.
0 Do not connect a NETWORK connector directly to the LAN port / Ethernet
connector on your computer.
0 Various online services may be discontinued without prior notice.
.
Connecting an external control device

REMOTE CONTROL jacks
When this unit is installed in a location where the remote control signals cannot reach (installation in a cabinet etc.), it can still be controlled by the remote
control by connecting a remote control receiver unit (sold separately).
You can also use it to remotely control ZONE2 (separate room).
Infrared Infrared
retransmitter sensor
AUX Input Output

OUT
.
Connecting the power cord

After completing all the connections, insert the power plug into the power outlet.
Power cord (supplied)

To household power outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
.
o Contents
Playback network audio/service
Listening to Internet Radio 87
Basic operation Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS 91
Turning the power on 64
Listening to Pandora® 95
Selecting the input source 64
Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio 102
Adjusting the volume 65
AirPlay function 105
Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) 65
Spotify Connect function 108
Selecting a sound mode 119
Convenience functions
Playback a device
Convenience functions 109
Playing a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player 65
HDMI control function 131
Playing an iPod 66
Smart Menu function 132
Playing a USB memory device 71
Sleep timer function 134
Listening to music on a Bluetooth device 74
Quick select plus function 136
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts 79
Other functions
Web control function 139
Playback in ZONE2 (Separate room) 141

Basic operation
Turning the power on
ZONE 2
ZO
ECO
POWER
PO
POWER X
1 Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
VOLU
LUME
SOU
OURC
RCE SLE
LEEP
DVD/
VD/
0 You can press the input source select button when the unit is in standby mode to
CBL/SAT
BL/SAT Blu-ra
Blu-ray Blu-r
Bl -ray
GAME
GA AUX
MED
EDIA
PLAY
PLAYER CHA
HANN
NNEL turn on the power.
Input source 0 You can also switch the power to standby by pressing X on the main unit.
select buttons
iPod/
iPod/USB TV AUDI
A DIO TUN
UNER
ONLIN
ONLINE INTERNET
INTERNET
Blu
luetoo
etooth PAG
AGE
Selecting the input source

MUSIC RADI
ADIO
SOU
OUND
ND MO
MODE
INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION
1 Press the input source select button to be played back.

The desired input source can be selected directly.
ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
VOLUME df
0 You can also select the input source by turning SOURCE SELECT on the main
BACK SETUP
SET
UNE
TUN TUNE
TU MUTE
K SE
QUICK SELECT
MUTE : unit.
1 2 3 4
.
Adjusting the volume Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc

player
1 Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.
The following describes the procedure for playing DVD player/Blu-ray Disc
player.
0 The variable range differs according to the input signal and channel level setting.
0 You can also adjust the master volume by turning MASTER VOLUME on the main 1 Prepare for playback.
unit. A Turn on the power of the TV, subwoofer and player.
B Change the TV input to the input of this unit.
2 Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.

Turning off the sound temporarily
(Muting) 3 Press DVD/Blu-ray or Blu-ray to switch the input source
of the player to be played back.
1 Press MUTE :. 4 Play the DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player.

0 MUTE indicator on the display flashes.
0 : appears on the TV screen. o Surround playback (v p. 119)
0 The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” in the menu. (v p. 158)
0 To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE : again.

Playing an iPod
0 You can use the USB cable provided with the iPod to connect the iPod
with the unit’s USB port and enjoy music stored on the iPod.
0 For information on the iPod models that can be played back with this
unit, see “Supported iPod/iPhone models” (v p. 56).
0 See “AirPlay function” (v p. 105) on how to play a music file saved on
ZONE 2
ZO POWER
PO
ECO
SOU
OURC
RCE
LUME
VOLU
SLE
LEEP
an iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes on this unit via the network.
DVD/
VD/
CBL/SAT
BL/SAT Blu-ra
Blu-ray Blu-r
Bl -ray
MED
EDIA
GAME
GA AUX PLAY
PLAYER HANN
CHANNEL
iPod/
iPod/USB TV A
AUDI
DIO TUN
UNER
iPod/USB ONLIN
ONLINE
MUSIC luetoo
Bluetooth
INTERNET
INTERNET
RADI
ADIO PAG
AGE
PAGE df
SOU
OUND
ND MO
MODE
INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION
OPTION
uio p ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
ENTER
BACK BACK
UNE
TUN
SETUP
SET
TUNE
TU MUTE
1/3
1
QUICK
2
K SE
SELECT
3 4
89
.
o Operations accessible through the option

Listening to music on an iPod
menu
1 Connect the iPod to the USB port. (v p. 55) This can be operated when the “iPod Browse Mode” is set to “From
iPod”. (v p. 68)
2 Press iPod/USB to switch the input source to “iPod/

USB”.
0 “iPod Browse Mode settings” (v p. 68)
0 “Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Ch
Level Adjust)” (v p. 115)
“Browse from iPod” is displayed on the display of this unit.
0 “Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 116)
0 Nothing is displayed on the TV screen.
0 “Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
3 Operate iPod itself while seeing the iPod screen to play

back music.
Select)” (v p. 117)
0 “Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 118)
0 “iPod Browse Mode” has two modes, “From iPod” and “On-Screen”. The default
setting is “From iPod” that operate the iPod itself while looking at the iPod screen.
0 To change to “On-Screen”, where you perform operations while having the iPod
information displayed on the TV screen, see “iPod Browse Mode settings”
(v p. 68).
NOTE
0 Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some functions may not
operate.
0 Note that Denon will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising
with the data on an iPod when using this unit in conjunction with the iPod.

iPod Browse Mode settings Operation buttons Function

1/3 Playback / Pause
In this mode, various lists and screens during playback on the iPod are
Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
displayed on the TV screen. 89
This section describes the steps up to playing back tracks on the iPod in (Press and hold) Fast-reverse/Fast-forward
“On-Screen”. Playback / Pause
ENTER
1
(Press and hold) Stop
Press OPTION when the input source is “iPod/USB”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
ui (Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-
2 Select “iPod Browse Mode”, then press ENTER.
The “iPod Browse Mode” screen is displayed.
forward
Switch to the previous page/next page in
PAGE d f
the list display
3 Use o p to select “On-Screen”, then press ENTER. 0 The actions of the operation buttons may differ.
0 Operations available for “On-Screen” and “From iPod” are listed
below.
iPod Browse Mode From iPod On-Screen 0 The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title etc. each time
the main unit’s STATUS is pressed during playback with “iPod Browse Mode” set
Music file P P to “On-Screen”.
Playable files 0 English letters, numbers and certain symbols are displayed. Incompatible
Video file z
characters are displayed as “.” (period).
Remote control
P P
Active buttons unit (This unit)
iPod P
zOnly the sound is played.
4 Use ui p to select the file to be played, then press

ENTER.
Playback starts.


menu
This can be operated when the “iPod Browse Mode” is set to “On-
Screen”. (v p. 68)
0 “iPod Browse Mode settings” (v p. 68)
0 “Performing repeat playback” (v p. 70)
0 “Performing random playback” (v p. 70)

Performing repeat playback Performing random playback
1 Press OPTION with “iPod Browse Mode” set to “On-

Screen”.
1 Press OPTION with “iPod Browse Mode” set to “On-
Screen”.
The option menu screen is displayed. The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select “Repeat”, then press ENTER. 2 Use ui to select “Random”, then press ENTER.
3 Use o p to select repeat playback mode. 3 Use o p to select random playback mode.
Off Off
Repeat playback mode is canceled. Disable random playback.
(Default) : (Default):
One: A file being played is played repeatedly. Randomly play back all tracks in the
On:
All files in the folder currently being current playback folder.
All:
played are played repeatedly.
4 Press ENTER.
4 Press ENTER. The display returns to the playback screen.
The display returns to the playback screen.
0 During random playback, each time playback of a track is completed, another

track is randomly selected for playback from tracks in the folder. Therefore, it’s
0 “Repeat” settings are stored for each input source.
possible that you may hear a track played back more than once during random
playback.
0 “Random” settings are stored for each input source.

Playing a USB memory device

0 Playing back music or viewing still picture (JPEG) files stored on a USB
memory device.
0 Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class standards
can be played on this unit.
0 This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in “FAT16” or
ZONE 2
ZO POWER
PO
ECO
SOU
OURC
RCE
LUME
VOLU
SLE
LEEP
“FAT32” format.
0 The audio/video format types and specifications supported by this unit
DVD/
VD/
CBL/SAT
BL/SAT Blu-ra
Blu-ray Blu-r
Bl -ray
GAME
GA AUX
MED
EDIA
HANN
CHANNEL
for playback are as follows.
See “Playing back a USB memory devices” (v p. 237) for details.
PLAY
PLAYER
iPod/
iPod/USB TV A
AUDI
DIO TUN
UNER
iPod/USB 0 WMA
ONLIN
ONLINE
MUSIC luetoo
Bluetooth
INTERNET
INTERNET
RADI
ADIO PAG
AGE
PAGE df 0 MP3
SOU
OUND
ND MO
MODE 0 WAV
0 MPEG-4 AAC
INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION
0 FLAC
OPTION
ui p 0 ALAC
0 AIFF
ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
ENTER
0 DSD
BACK BACK
UNE
TUN
SETUP
SET
TUNE
TU MUTE
1/3 0 JPEG
1
QUICK
2
K SE
SELECT
3 4
89
.
Playing files stored on USB memory Operation buttons Function

Playback / Pause
devices
1/3
1
89 (Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-
Connect the USB memory device to the USB port. forward
(v p. 55)
Playback / Pause
ENTER
2 Press iPod/USB to switch the input source to “iPod/
USB”.
ui (Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-
USB [1/9] forward
PAGE d f
the list display
Folder1
Folder2
Folder3
Music1
Music2
Music3
0 When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while
playing the file.
Music4
OPTION Option 0 This unit plays back picture (JPEG) files in the order in which they are stored in the
folder.
.
3 Use ui p to select the file to be played, then press
ENTER.
NOTE
0 Note that Denon will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising with
Playback starts. the data on a USB memory device when using this unit in conjunction with the USB
memory device.


menu
0 “Performing repeat playback” (v p. 110)
0 “Searching content with keywords (Text Search)” (v p. 112)
0 “Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time
(Slideshow)” (v p. 113)
0 “Setting the Slideshow Interval” (v p. 114)

Listening to music on a Bluetooth device

Music files stored on Bluetooth devices such as smartphones, digital
music players, etc. can be enjoyed on this unit by pairing and connecting
this unit with the Bluetooth device.
Communication is possible up to a range of about 32.8 ft/10 m.
ZONE 2
ZO POWER
PO
ECO
NOTE
LUME
VOLU
SOU
OURC
RCE SLE
LEEP
DVD/
VD/
0 To play back music from a Bluetooth device, the Bluetooth device needs to
CBL/SAT
BL/SAT Blu-ra
Blu-ray Blu-r
Bl -ray
GAME
GA AUX
MED
EDIA
PLAY
PLAYER HANN
CHANNEL support the A2DP profile.
iPod/
iPod/USB TV A
AUDI
DIO TUN
UNER
ONLIN
ONLINE INTERNET
INTERNET
MUSIC Blu
luetoo
etooth RADI
ADIO PAG
AGE
Bluetooth
SOU
OUND
ND MO
MODE
ui
ENTER INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION
OPTION
ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
BACK
1/3
BACK SETUP
SET
UNE
TUN TUNE
TU MUTE
1
QUICK
2
K SE
SELECT
3 4
89
.
Playing music from Bluetooth device 3 Select this unit when its name appears in the list of
devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth
In order to enjoy music from a Bluetooth device on this unit, the Bluetooth
device must first be paired with this unit.
device.
Once the Bluetooth device has been paired, it does not need to be paired Connect to the Bluetooth device while “Pairing” is being displayed
again. on the display of the unit.
Perform the connection with the Bluetooth device close to the unit
1 Press Bluetooth to switch the input source to (about 3.3 ft/1 m).
4
“Bluetooth”.
When a number appears on the display of this unit,
check that it is the same number as that shown on the
Bluetooth screen of the Bluetooth device and then select “Pair”
Pairing Mode for both the Bluetooth device and the unit.
Turn on Bluetooth from your mobile device’s At the end of the pairing, the device name appears on the display of
settings menu, then select
“Denon AVR-X1300W” when it appears
this unit.
5
in the device list.
Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device.

Cancel 0 The Bluetooth device can also be operated with the remote
control of this unit.
0 The next time the input source is switched to Bluetooth, this unit
automatically connects to the last Bluetooth device that was
.
When using for the first time, the unit will go into the pairing mode
automatically and “Pairing...” will appear on the display of the unit. connected.
2 Activate the Bluetooth settings on your mobile device.

0 Enter “0000” when the password is requested on the screen of the Bluetooth
device.

Operation buttons Function

NOTE
0 To operate the Bluetooth device with the remote control of this unit, the Bluetooth
Skip to previous track / Skip to next track device needs to support the AVRCP profile.
89 (Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast- 0 The remote control of this unit is not guaranteed to work with all Bluetooth devices.
forward 0 Depending on the type of Bluetooth device, this unit outputs audio that is coupled
to the volume setting on the Bluetooth device.
Playback / Pause
ENTER
(Press and hold) Stop o Operations accessible through the option
Skip to previous track / Skip to next track menu
ui (Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast- 0 “Pairing with other Bluetooth devices” (v p. 77)
forward 0 “Performing repeat playback” (v p. 110)
0 Press STATUS on this unit during playback to switch the display between Title Level Adjust)” (v p. 115)
name, Artist name, Album name, etc.
0 English letters, numbers and certain symbols are displayed. Incompatible
characters are displayed as “.” (period). 0 “Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Pairing with other Bluetooth devices

0 This unit can be paired with a maximum of 8 Bluetooth devices. When a 9th
Pair a Bluetooth device with this unit. Bluetooth device is paired, it will be registered in place of the oldest registered
device.
1 Activate the Bluetooth settings on your mobile device. 0 Enter “0000” when the password is requested on the screen of the Bluetooth
device.
2 Press OPTION when the input source is “Bluetooth”. 0 Press and hold the Bluetooth on the remote control for at least 3 seconds to go
into pairing mode.
3 Use ui to select “Pairing Mode”, then press ENTER.

The device will go into the pairing mode.
4 Select this unit when its name appears in the list of

devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth
device.
5 When a number appears on the display of this unit,

check that it is the same number as that shown on the
screen of the Bluetooth device and then select “Pair”
for both the Bluetooth device and the unit.
At the end of the pairing, the device name appears on the display of
this unit.

Reconnecting to this unit from a

Bluetooth device
After pairing is completed, the Bluetooth device can be connected without
performing any operations on this unit.
This operation also needs to be performed when switching the Bluetooth
device for playback.
1 If a Bluetooth device is currently connected, deactivate

the Bluetooth setting of that device to disconnect it.
2 Activate the Bluetooth setting of the Bluetooth device

to be connected.
3 Select this unit from the Bluetooth device list on your

Bluetooth device.
4 Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device.
0 When the power of this unit is turned on, the input source will be automatically
switched to “Bluetooth” if a Bluetooth device is connected.
0 When the “Network Control” setting of this unit is set to “Always On” and a
Bluetooth device is connected with the unit in the standby state, the power of the
unit will be turned on automatically. (v p. 196)

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts

You can use the built-in tuner of this unit to listen to FM broadcasts and
AM broadcasts.
Make sure the FM antenna and AM loop antenna are connected to this
unit first.
ZONE 2
ZO POWER
PO
ECO
LUME
VOLU
SOU
OURC
RCE SLE
LEEP
DVD/
VD/
CBL/SAT
BL/SAT Blu-ra
Blu-ray Blu-r
Bl -ray
GAME
GA AUX
MED
EDIA
PLAY
PLAYER CHA
HANN
NNEL
CHANNEL +, –
iPod/
iPod/USB TV A
AUDI
DIO TUN
UNER
ONLIN
ONLINE
MUSIC luetoo
Bluetooth
INTERNET
INTERNET
RADI
ADIO PAG
AGE
TUNER
SOU
OUND
ND MO
MODE
INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION
OPTION
uio p ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
ENTER
BACK BACK
TUN
UNE
SETUP
SET
TUNE
TU MUTE
QUICK
K SE
SELECT
TUNE +, –
1 2 3 4
.
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts 5 Use o p to select “FM” or “AM”, then press ENTER.
1 Connect the antenna. (“Connecting an FM/AM

antenna” (v p. 57))
FM:
AM:
When listening to an FM broadcast.
When listening to an AM broadcast.
2 Press TUNER to switch the input source to “Tuner”.

6 Press TUNE + or TUNE - to select the station you want
listen to.
G TV screen H
Scanning is performed until it finds an available radio station. When
it finds a radio station, it stops the scan automatically and tunes in.
FM 92.10MHz AUTO 0 The modes for receiving FM broadcasts consists of “Auto” mode that automatically
Tuner
CH 1
searches available broadcast stations and “Manual” mode that lets you tune in
using buttons to change the frequency. The default setting is “Auto”. You can also
use “Direct Tune” to tune in by entering the frequency directly.
Tune Preset OPTION Option
In “Auto” mode, you cannot tune in to radio stations if the reception is not good.
If this is the case, then use the “Manual” mode or “Direct Tune” mode to tune in.

.
GDisplay of this unitH TUNE +, – Selects the radio station (up/down)
CHANNEL +, - Selects preset radio stations
01 FM 92.10MHz
ui Selects the radio station (up/down)
.
Selects preset radio stations
3
op
Press OPTION.
4 Use ui to select “FM/AM”, then press ENTER.

This displays the reception band input screen.


Tuning in by entering the frequency
menu
(Direct Tune)
0 “Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)” (v p. 81)
0 “Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)” (v p. 82) You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.
0 “Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto
Preset)” (v p. 82) 1 Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
0 “Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset The option menu screen is displayed.
Memory)” (v p. 83)
0 “Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset
Name)” (v p. 84)
2 Use ui to select “Direct Tune”, then press ENTER.
The screen that lets you enter the frequency is displayed.
“Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)” (v p. 85)
3
0
0 “Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Ch Use ui to select a number, then press p.
Level Adjust)” (v p. 115) 0 If o is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled.
“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 116)
4
0
0 “Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Repeat step 3 and enter the frequency of the radio
Select)” (v p. 117) station you want to hear.
“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 118)
5
0
When setting is completed, press ENTER.
The preset frequency is tuned in.

Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode) Tuning in to stations and presetting
You can change the mode for tuning into FM and AM broadcasts. If you them automatically (Auto Preset)
cannot tune in automatically with “Auto” mode, change the mode to
“Manual” and tune in manually. A maximum of 56 radio stations can be automatically preset.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”. 1 Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.
2 Use ui to select “Tune Mode”, then press ENTER. 2 Use ui to select “Auto Preset”, then press ENTER.
3 Use o p to select the tune mode, then press ENTER. 3 Press ENTER.
The unit starts to tune in to radio stations automatically and preset
Automatically search for and tune to a them.
Auto: 0 When presetting is completed, “Completed” is displayed for about
receivable radio station.
5 seconds and the option menu screen turns off.
Manually change the frequency one
Manual: step at a time each time the button is
pressed.
0 The preset memory is overwritten.

Presetting the current broadcast Channel Default settings

92.10 / 92.30 / 92.50 / 92.70 / 93.10 / 93.50 / 93.70 / 94.10
station (Preset Memory) 1–8
MHz
Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them 94.30 / 94.50 / 94.70 / 94.90 / 95.10 / 95.30 / 95.50 / 95.70
9 – 16
in easily. MHz
Up to 56 stations can be preset. 98.10 / 98.30 / 98.50 / 98.70 / 98.90 / 99.10 / 100.10 /
17 – 24
100.30 MHz
1 Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset.
(“Listening to FM/AM broadcasts” (v p. 80)) 25 – 32
100.50 / 100.70 / 100.90 / 101.10 / 101.30 / 101.50 /
101.70 / 101.90 MHz
2 Press OPTION. 33 – 40
103.10 / 103.30 / 103.50 / 103.70 / 103.90 / 104.10 /
104.30 / 104.50 MHz
104.70 / 104.90 / 105.10 / 105.30 / 105.50 / 105.70 /
41 – 48
3 Use ui to select “Preset Memory”, then press ENTER. 105.90 / 106.10 MHz
106.30 / 106.50 / 106.70 / 106.90 / 107.10 / 107.30 /
The list of already preset channels is displayed. 49 – 56
107.50 / 107.90 MHz
4 Use ui to select the channel you want to preset, then

press ENTER.
The current broadcast station that is preset.
Listening to preset stations
0 To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.
1 Use CHANNEL + or CHANNEL - to select the desired
preset channel.
0 You can also select preset broadcast stations by pressing TUNER PRESET CH +
or TUNER PRESET CH - on the main unit.

Specify a name for the preset 5 Use ui to select a name label, then press ENTER.
broadcast station (Preset Name) The screen that lets you edit the Preset Name is displayed.
0 If you select “Set Defaults”, then the unit returns to displaying the
You can set the name to the preset broadcast station or change it. frequency.
Up to eight characters can be input.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”. 6 Enter the characters, then press “OK”.
0 For character input, see “Using the keyboard
The option menu screen is displayed. screen” (v p. 150).
2 Use ui to select “Preset Name”, then press ENTER.

7 Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.
The Preset Name screen is displayed.
3 Use o p to select the group of the broadcast station

you want to name.
4 Use ui to select the broadcast station you want to

name, then press ENTER.

Skipping preset broadcast stations n To set the stations you want to skip by stations
(Preset Skip) A Use o p to select the group of broadcast stations you want to
skip.
Perform auto preset memory to save all the broadcasting stations that can
B Use ui to select the broadcast station you want to skip.
be received in the memory. Selecting a broadcast station becomes easier
C Use o p to select “Skip”.
by skipping unnecessary memories.
The station you selected is not displayed.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is “Tuner”.

4 Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.
2 Use ui to select “Preset Skip”, then press ENTER.

The “Preset Skip” screen is displayed.
3 n To set the stations you want to skip by groups

A Use o p to select the group of broadcast stations you want to
skip.
B Press u to select “Set No.z – z to Skip”, then press ENTER.
Skip all the broadcast stations that are included in the
selected group “z-z”.
(z is the selected group number.)

Cancelling Preset Skip
1 While the “Preset Skip” screen is displayed, use o p to

select a group containing a broadcast station to cancel
the skip for.
2 Use ui to select a broadcast station to cancel the skip

for.
3 Use o p to select “On”.

The skip is cancelled.
NOTE
0 “Preset Skip” cannot be cancelled for groups.

Listening to Internet Radio

0 Internet Radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet.
Internet Radio stations from around the world can be received.
0 The Internet radio station list on this unit the database service provided
by vTuner radio station.
0 The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for
ZONE 2
ZO POWER
PO
ECO
SOU
OURC
RCE
LUME
VOLU
SLE
LEEP
playback are as follows.
CBL/SAT
BL/SAT
DVD/
VD/
Blu-ra
Blu-ray Blu-r
Bl -ray See “Playing back Internet Radio” (v p. 240) for details.
GAME
GA AUX
MED
EDIA
PLAY
PLAYER HANN
CHANNEL 0 WMA
iPod/
iPod/USB TV A
AUDI
DIO TUN
UNER
0 MP3
0 MPEG-4 AAC
ONLINE ONLIN
ONLINE
MUSIC luetoo
Blu
INTERNET
INTERNET
etooth RADI
ADIO PAG
AGE
PAGE df
MUSIC SOU
OUND
ND MO
MODE
INTERNET
RADIO
INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION
OPTION
uio p ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
ENTER
BACK
BACK SETUP
SET
UNE
TUN TUNE
TU MUTE
1/3
QUICK
K SE
SELECT
1 2 3 4
.
Listening to Internet Radio 4 Use ui to select the search method for the radio
station that you wish to playback and then press
1 Prepare for playback. ENTER.
0 Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.
Select the various regions.
(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 59)) Name of country:
Displays typical Internet Radio stations.
2 Press ONLINE MUSIC.

Search Stations:
Displays all Internet Radio stations that
this unit can tune in to.
0 You can also press INTERNET RADIO to select the input source
“Internet Radio” directly. Displays Internet Radio stations in the
Search Podcasts:
podcasts that this unit can tune in to.
3 Use uio p to select “Internet Radio”, then press
ENTER.
Recommended Displays recommended Internet Radio
Stations: stations.
Displays Internet Radio stations added
Online Music to favorites in vTuner. For instructions
radiodenon.com: on how to add to favorites in vTuner,
Favorites Internet Radio Media Server
see “Using vTuner to add Internet Radio
stations to favorites” (v p. 90).
Displays recently played Internet Radio
Recently Played: stations. Up to 20 stations can be
stored in “Recently Played”.
Displays Internet Radio stations
searched by keyword. For character
Search by Keyword:
input, see “Using the keyboard
.
screen” (v p. 150).

5 Use ui p to select the station, then press ENTER. Playing the last played Internet Radio
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”. station
1/3 Playback / Stop 1 Press INTERNET RADIO.
The source switches to “Internet Radio” and the last played radio
ENTER (Press and hold) Stop station plays.
PAGE d f
the list display
0 The display switches between track title and radio station name etc. each time the
menu
main unit’s STATUS is pressed. 0 “Registering to Favorites (Save to Favorite)” (v p. 111)
0 Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “.” (period). 0 “Searching content with keywords (Text Search)” (v p. 112)
0 “Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time
NOTE (Slideshow)” (v p. 113)
0 The radio station database service may be suspended or be otherwise unavailable 0 “Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Ch
without notice. Level Adjust)” (v p. 115)

Using vTuner to add Internet Radio 4 Enter your E-mail address and a password of your
stations to favorites choice.
There are many Internet Radio stations in the world, and this unit can tune
into these stations. But finding the radio station you want to hear may be
5 Select the search criteria (genre, region, language,
etc.) of your choice.
difficult, because there are too many stations. If this is the case, then 0 You can also enter a keyword to search for a station you want to
please use vTuner, an Internet Radio station search website specifically hear.
designed for this unit. You can use your PC to search Internet Radio
stations and add them as your favorites. This unit can play radio stations
added to vTuner.
6 Select the radio station of your choice from the list, and
then click the Add to Favorites icon.
1 Check the MAC address of this unit.

(“Information” (v p. 196)) 7 Enter the name of the favorite group, then click “Go”.
A new favorite group that includes the selected radio station is
0 The MAC address is necessary when you create an account for created.
vTuner.
0 Internet Radio stations added to favorites in vTuner can be played
2
from “radiodenon.com” with this unit. (v p. 88)
Use your PC to access the vTuner website
(http://www.radiodenon.com).
3
0 You can also add a radio station that is not in the vTuner list.
Enter the MAC address of this unit, then click “Go”.

Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS

0 This unit can play back music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) stored on a
PC and on Network Attached Storage (NAS) that supports DLNA.
0 The network audio playback function of this unit connects to the server
using technologies shown below.
ZONE 2
ZO
ECO
POWER
PO Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service
LUME
VOLU
0 The audio/video format types and specifications supported by this unit
for playback are as follows.
SOU
OURC
RCE SLE
LEEP
DVD/
VD/
CBL/SAT
BL/SAT Blu-ra
Blu-ray Blu-r
Bl -ray
For details, see “Playing back a file saved on a PC or

NAS” (v p. 239).
MED
EDIA
GAME
GA AUX PLAY
PLAYER HANN
CHANNEL
0 WMA
iPod/
iPod/USB TV A
AUDI
DIO TUN
UNER
ONLINE ONLIN
ONLINE
MUSIC luetoo
Bluetooth
INTERNET
INTERNET
RADI
ADIO PAG
AGE
PAGE df 0 MP3
MUSIC SOU
OUND
ND MO
MODE
0 WAV
0 MPEG-4 AAC
INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION 0 FLAC
OPTION 0 ALAC
uio p ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
0 AIFF
ENTER
0 DSD
BACK BACK
UNE
TUN
SETUP
SET
TUNE
TU MUTE
1/3 0 JPEG
1
QUICK
2
K SE
SELECT
3 4
89
.
Applying media sharing settings

Here, we apply the settings to share music files stored on a PC and NAS on the network.
To use Windows Media Player as a music server, configure the settings below in advance.
To use a music server other than Windows Media Player, consult the help contents of your music server to configure settings.
.
o When using Windows Media Player 12 o When using Windows Media Player 11
(Windows 7 / Windows 8)
1 Start up Windows Media Player 11 on the PC.
1 Start up Windows Media Player 12 on the PC.

2 Select “Media Sharing” in the “Library”.
2 Select “More streaming options...” in the “Stream”.

3 Click the “Share my media” check box, select “Denon
3 Select “Allowed” in the “Denon AVR-X1300W” drop- AVR-X1300W”, and then click “Allow”.
4
down list.
As you did in step 3, select the icon of the device (other
4 Select “Allowed” in the drop-down list for “Media

programs on this PC and remote connections...”.
PCs and mobile devices) you want to use as a media
controller, and then click “Allow”.
5 Follow the screen instructions to end the setting. 5 Click “OK” to finish.
o Sharing media stored in NAS

Change settings on the NAS to allow this unit and other devices (PCs
and mobile devices) used as media controllers to access the NAS. For
details, see the owner’s manual that came with the NAS.

Playing back files stored on a PC and 4 Use ui to select the server including the file to be
NAS played, then press ENTER.
Use this procedure to play music files, image files or playlists. 5 Use iu p to select the file, then press ENTER.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
1 Prepare for playback.
A Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.
(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 59)) 1/3 Playback / Pause
B Prepare the computer. (vComputer’s operating instructions)
2 Press ONLINE MUSIC. 89 (Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-

forward
3 Use uio p to select “Media Server”, then press

ENTER.
ENTER
Playback / Pause
Online Music ui (Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-
forward

PAGE d f
the list display
.

0 The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title each time the menu
main unit’s STATUS is pressed.
0 When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album 0 “Performing repeat playback” (v p. 110)
art data, the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing. 0 “Performing random playback” (v p. 110)
0 If you use Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player, the album art for WMA files 0 “Registering to Favorites (Save to Favorite)” (v p. 111)
can be displayed.
0 “Searching content with keywords (Text Search)” (v p. 112)
0 WMA Lossless files can be played when using a server supporting transcoding,
such as Windows Media Player (Ver.11 or later). 0 “Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time
0 This unit plays back picture (JPEG) files in the order in which they are stored in the (Slideshow)” (v p. 113)
folder. 0 “Setting the Slideshow Interval” (v p. 114)
NOTE Level Adjust)” (v p. 115)
0 When playing back music files with your PC or NAS connected through wireless 0 “Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 116)
LAN, audio may be interrupted depending on your wireless LAN environment. In 0 “Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
this case, connect using a wired LAN. Select)” (v p. 117)
0 Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may be required 0 “Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 118)
for the file to be displayed.
0 The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on the server
specifications. If the tracks/files are not displayed in alphabetical order due to the
server specifications, searching by the first letter may not work properly.

Listening to Pandora®
Pandora is an automated music recommendation and Internet Radio
service created by the Music Genome Project.
To listen to Pandora you will need a free Pandora account.
If you do not have a Pandora account, you can create one at
www.pandora.com or from the Pandora smartphone application.
ZONE 2
ZO POWER
PO
ECO
Playback of Pandora in this unit requires the Pandora account to be linked

LUME
VOLU
SOU
OURC
RCE SLE
LEEP
CBL/SAT
BL/SAT
DVD/
VD/
Blu-ra
Blu-ray Blu-r
Bl -ray to the unit. Therefore, access http://www.pandora.com/denon from your
GAME
GA AUX
MED
EDIA
PLAY
PLAYER HANN
CHANNEL
personal computer and perform the linkage.
iPod/
iPod/USB TV A
AUDI
DIO TUN
UNER
ONLINE ONLIN
ONLINE
MUSIC luetoo
Bluetooth
INTERNET
INTERNET
RADI
ADIO PAG
AGE
PAGE df
MUSIC SOU
OUND
ND MO
MODE
INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION
OPTION
uio p ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
ENTER
BACK BACK
UNE
TUN
SETUP
SET
TUNE
TU MUTE
1/3
1
QUICK
2
K SE
SELECT
3 4
9
.
Listening to Pandora® 4 If you have a Pandora account, use ui to select “I

have a Pandora account”, then press ENTER.
1 Prepare for playback. 0 If you do not have a Pandora account, to select “I am to new to
Pandora”, then press ENTER. The URL of Pandora and activation
0 Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power. code are displayed. Access the Pandora web page from your PC
(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 59)) and register the displayed activation code and account
information. Then press ENTER.
3 Use uio p to select “Pandora”, then press ENTER. Pandora
I have a Pandora account

I am to new to Pandora
Online Music
Please go to
http://www.pandora.com/denon and follow
Favorites Internet Radio Media Server the instructions there to create a new account.
Your activation code is : zzzzzz
BACK Cancel Continue
This is an identification code required to

register your purchased product to the
Pandora service.
.
This code is used to obtain your account.
.
5 Input “Email address” and “Password”.

0 Press BACK to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is
displayed, select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
6 After inputting the “Email address” and “Password”,

select “OK”, then press ENTER.
If the “Email address” and “Password” match, the top menu for
Pandora is displayed.
My Station [1/4]
New Station
Shuffle
Music1 Radio
Sign Out
OPTION Option
.
Creating a new station Operation buttons Function

You can create up to 100 radio stations.
9 Skip to next track
1 Use ui to select “New Station”, then press ENTER.

ENTER
Playback / Pause
2 Input a track or artist name, then press “OK”. i Skip to next track
screen” (v p. 150). PAGE d f
the list display
3 Use ui to select “Search by Artist” or “Search by

Track”, then press ENTER.
You can search and display a list by track or artist.
4 Use ui, select a file from the list, press ENTER.

New station is created.
0 Your new station will play music with similar qualities to the artist or track you
entered.

Listening to an existing station
1 Use ui and select the radio station that you want to

listen to, then press ENTER.
0 You can skip up to 6 tracks that are being played back within 1 hour.
Listening to created radio stations at

random
1 Use ui to select “Shuffle”, then press ENTER.

Created radio stations are selected at random, and tracks are
streamed.

Giving feedback and managing Bookmarks the artist currently being

played.
stations Bookmark this track : You can check on a computer or iPhone
etc.
You can personalize your stations by providing feedback. For details, see the Pandora web page.
1 Press p while a track is playing.

I’m tired of this track :
Press when you don’t like the track that
is being played.
The Pandora menu screen is displayed. The track will not be played for 1 month.
Press when you like the track that is Press when you want to delete the
Delete this station :
being played. station that is being played.
I like this track : Playback a favorite track.
Display the E (Thumbs up) icon.
Press when you don’t like the track that
is being played.
I don’t like this track : Delete that track from the radio station.
Display the D (Thumbs down) icon.
Why is this track Displays the reason why Pandora
playing? : selected this track.
Creates a station for the track or artist
Create station :
being played.

Sign Out
Disassociate this unit from your Pandora account.
1 Use ui to select “Sign Out”, then press ENTER.
2 When the popup menu appears, use o p to select

“Yes”, then press ENTER.

menu
0 “Registering to Favorites (Save to Favorite)” (v p. 111)

Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio

You can access SiriusXM to enjoy access to a wide range of unique
content.
An All Access package lets you listen to SiriusXM on your computer,
smartphone, tablet or Lynx Portable.
For details, see the SiriusXM homepage.
ZONE 2
ZO POWER
PO
ECO
SOU
OURC
RCE
LUME
VOLU
SLE
LEEP
http://www.siriusxm.com
DVD/
VD/
CBL/SAT
BL/SAT Blu-ra
Blu-ray Blu-r
Bl -ray
MED
EDIA
GAME
GA AUX PLAY
PLAYER HANN
CHANNEL
iPod/
iPod/USB TV A
AUDI
DIO TUN
UNER
ONLINE ONLIN
ONLINE
MUSIC luetoo
Bluetooth
INTERNET
INTERNET
RADI
ADIO PAG
AGE
PAGE df
MUSIC SOU
OUND
ND MO
MODE
INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION
OPTION
uio p ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
ENTER
BACK BACK SETUP
SET
1/3
UNE
TUN TUNE
TU MUTE
QUICK
K SE
SELECT
1 2 3 4
.
Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio 3 Use uio p to select “SiriusXM”, then press ENTER.
Over 155 channels commercial-free music, plus play-by-play sports,
exclusive talk, comedy and entertainment. Online Music
1 Prepare for playback. Favorites Internet Radio Media Server
A Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.

(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 59))
B Access the following website from your PC and obtain a SiriusXM
account.
http://www.siriusxm.com
0 If you already have SiriusXM Internet Radio credentials, select
“Sign in” in step 4 and enter your SiriusXM username and
.
4
password. If you need to setup a SiriusXM account or Internet
Select “Sign in” and then press ENTER.
Radio credentials, visit http://care.siriusxm.com
2 Press ONLINE MUSIC. 5 Input “Username” and “Password”.

6 Select the “Sign in”, then press ENTER.

The top menu of SiriusXM is displayed.

7 Use ui to select the genre, then press ENTER. Sign Out

8
Disassociate this unit from your SiriusXM account.
Use ui to select the file, then press ENTER.
The selected file is displayed.
1 Use ui to select “Sign Out”, then press ENTER.
Operation buttons
1/3 Playback / Stop
Function
2 When the popup menu appears, use o p to select
“Yes”, then press ENTER.
Playback
ENTER
PAGE d f
the list display menu
0 “Registering to Favorites (Save to Favorite)” (v p. 111)

AirPlay function
Music files stored on your iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes can be
Router
played on this unit via the network. PC
This unit
0 + is displayed on the menu screen while AirPlay is being operated.

0 Source input will be switched to “Online Music” when AirPlay playback is started.
0 You can stop AirPlay playback by pressing o or choosing other input source.
0 To see song and artist names together, press STATUS on the main unit.
0 For information about how to use iTunes, also see the Help for iTunes.
0 The screen may differ depending on the OS and software versions.
.
Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod Playing iTunes music with this unit
touch or iPad
If you update your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad” to iOS 4.2.1 or later, you can 1 Install iTunes 10, or later, on a Mac or Windows PC that
is connected to the same network as this unit.
stream music stored in your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad” directly to this unit.
1 Connect your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad Wi-Fi to the 2 Turn this unit ON.
same network as this unit. Set “Network Control” to “Always On” for this unit. (v p. 202)
0 For details, see your device’s manual.
NOTE
2 Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad. 0 When “Network Control” is set to “Always On”, the unit consumes more
standby power.
' is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.
3 Tap the AirPlay icon '. 3 Start iTunes and click the AirPlay icon ' to select the
main unit.
.
4 Choose a song and click play in iTunes.
AirDrop AirPlay
The music will stream to this unit.
.
4 Select the speaker (devices) you want to use.

Selecting multiple speakers (devices) Perform iTunes playback operations

It is possible to play iTunes songs on your home’s AirPlay compatible with the remote control unit of this unit
speakers (devices) other than those of this unit.
With this unit’s remote control unit, you can perform iTunes song play,
1 Click the AirPlay icon ' and select “Multiple”. pause, and auto search (cue) operations.
2 Check the speakers you want to use. 1 Select the “Edit” - “Preferences...” in the iTunes menu.
NOTE
2 Select “Devices” in the iTunes setting window.
0 In playback using the AirPlay function, the sound is output at the iPhone, iPod
touch, iPad or iTunes volume setting level.
3 Check “Allow iTunes audio control from remote
speakers”, and then click “OK”.
You should turn down the iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes volume prior to
playback and then adjust it to a suitable level.
0 This does not need to be set if using version 12 or later of iTunes.

Spotify Connect function

Spotify is the world’s most popular streaming service. If you subscribe to
Spotify Premium, you can control your new speaker with your phone or Playing Spotify music with this unit
tablet. Because Spotify is built-in to your speaker, you can still take calls or
Download the “Spotify App” onto your Android or iOS device beforehand.
use other apps - the music never stops.
To play a Spotify track in this unit, you need to register in the Spotify
For information on how to set up and use Spotify Connect please visit premium account first.
www.spotify.com/connect
Spotify server 1 Connect the Wi-Fi settings of the iOS or Android device
in the same network as this unit.
2 Launch the Spotify App.
3 Play back the Spotify track.
4 Tap the F icon to select the unit.

The music will stream to this unit.
Spotify App
This unit
Audio Control
streaming/
control
.
Convenience functions
0 This section explains how to use convenient functions that can be used
for each input source.
0 These functions can only be set in the MAIN ZONE.
ZONE 2
ZO POWER
PO
ECO
LUME
VOLU
SOU
OURC
RCE SLE
LEEP
DVD/
VD/
CBL/SAT
BL/SAT Blu-ra
Blu-ray Blu-r
Bl -ray
MED
EDIA
GAME
GA AUX PLAY
PLAYER HANN
CHANNEL
iPod/
iPod/USB TV A
AUDI
DIO TUN
UNER
ONLINE ONLIN
ONLINE
MUSIC luetoo
Bluetooth
INTERNET
INTERNET
RADI
ADIO PAG
AGE
MUSIC SOU
OUND
ND MO
MODE
INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION
OPTION
uio p ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
ENTER
BACK SETUP
SET
UNE
TUN TUNE
TU MUTE
QUICK
K SE
SELECT
1 2 3 4
.
Performing repeat playback Performing random playback

n Supported input sources: n Supported input sources :
USB / Media Server / Bluetooth USB / Media Server / Bluetooth
1 While content is playing, press OPTION. 1 While content is playing, press OPTION.
2 Use ui to select “Repeat”, then press ENTER. 2 Use ui to select “Random”, then press ENTER.
3 Use o p to select repeat playback mode. 3 Use o p to select random playback mode.
Off Off
Repeat playback mode is canceled. Disable random playback.
(Default): (Default):
One: A file being played is played repeatedly. Randomly play back all tracks in the
On:
All files in the folder currently being current playback folder.
All:
played are played repeatedly.
4 Press ENTER.
4 Press ENTER. The display returns to the playback screen.
The display returns to the playback screen.
0 During random playback, each time playback of a track is completed, another

track is randomly selected for playback from tracks in the folder. Therefore, it’s
0 This cannot be set up if the Bluetooth device does not support the repeat setting
possible that you may hear a track played back more than once during random
under the AVRCP profile.
playback.
0 “Repeat” settings are stored for each input source.
0 This cannot be set up if the Bluetooth device does not support the random setting
under the AVRCP profile.
0 “Random” settings are stored for each input source.

Registering to Favorites (Save to Playing back content added to

Favorite) “Favorites”
You can register a total of 100 favorites.
n Supported input sources : 1 Press ONLINE MUSIC.
Internet Radio / Media Server / Pandora / SiriusXM 2 Use uio p to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.
1 While content is playing, press OPTION. Online Music

2
Use ui to select “Save to Favorite”, then press

ENTER.
“Favorite added” is displayed, and the current content is added to
favorites.
0 The display returns to the playback screen when the procedure is
completed.
.
3 Use ui to select the content you want to play, then
press ENTER.
Playback starts.

Deleting content added to favorites Searching content with keywords (Text

Search)
n Supported input sources :
2 Use uio p to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.
USB / Internet Radio / Media Server
3 Use ui to select the content you want to delete from
favorites, then press OPTION. 1 While the content is playing, press OPTION.
4 Use ui to select “Remove from Fav.”, then press

ENTER.
2 Use ui to select “Text Search”, then press ENTER.
The keyboard input screen is displayed.
“Favorite removed” is displayed, and the selected content is deleted
from favorites.
0 The screen returns to the previous screen when the delete
3 Enter the first character of the Internet Radio station or
file you want to search for, and then press “OK”.
process is complete. 0 For character input, see “Using the keyboard
4 Use ui to select the content you want to play, then

press ENTER.
Playback starts.
0 “Text Search” searches for Internet Radio stations or files that start with the
entered first character from the displayed list.
NOTE
0 Text Search may not work for some lists.

Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time (Slideshow)
n Supported input sources : n Supported input sources :
USB Internet Radio / Media Server
1 Play back a still picture. 1 Play back a still picture.

0 Playing back still pictures stored on USB memory devices. 0 Play back still pictures stored on Media Server. (v p. 91)
(v p. 71)
2 Play back a music file of Media Server or Internet Radio
2 Play back a music file. (v p. 71) station.
0 “Listening to Internet Radio” (v p. 87)
3 Press OPTION. 0 “Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS” (v p. 91)
3 Press OPTION.
4 Use ui to select “Slideshow”, then press ENTER. The option menu screen is displayed.
The option menu disappears, and the picture you were viewing is
shown on the screen. 4 Use ui to select “Slideshow”, then press ENTER.
The option menu disappears, and the picture you were viewing is
shown on the screen.

Setting the Slideshow Interval

0 The “Slideshow Time” settings are reflected for all input sources.
Set the playback interval when playing back a slideshow of still picture
(JPEG) files stored on a USB memory device or media server.
n Supported input sources:

USB / Media Server
1 While the list is displayed, press OPTION.

2 Use ui to select “Slideshow Time”, then press ENTER.
3 Use o p to set the display time.
Off: The slide show is not played back.

Set the time for displaying a single
5s - 60s
picture when playing back images in the
(Default: 5s):
slide show.
4 Press ENTER.

Adjusting the volume of each channel

to match the input source (Ch Level 0 Select “Reset” and press ENTER if you want to restore the adjustment values of
the various channels to “0.0 dB” (default).
Adjust) 0 Headphone volume can be adjusted when a headphone is connected.
0 “Ch Level Adjust” settings are stored for each input source.
The volume of each channel can be changed while listening to music. You 0 You can only set this for speakers that output audio. In addition, you cannot set
can set this for each input source. this when in the menu “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”. (v p. 163)
1 Press OPTION.
2 Use ui to select “Ch Level Adjust”, then press ENTER.

The “Ch Level Adjust” screen is displayed.
3 Use ui to select the channel that you wish to adjust.
4 Use o p to adjust the volume.
–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)
5 Use uio p to select “Exit”, then press ENTER.

Adjusting the tone (Tone) 4 Select “On” in step 3 and press i to select the sound
range to be adjusted.
Adjusts the tonal quality of the sound.
1 Press OPTION. Bass:

Treble:
Adjust bass.
Adjust treble.
2 Use ui to select “Tone”, then press ENTER. 5 Use o p to adjust the tone, then press ENTER.
The “Tone” screen is displayed.
-6 dB – +6 dB (Default : 0 dB)
3 Use o p to set the tone control function to on/off.
On: Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble). 0 “Tone” settings are stored for each input source.
This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
Off 0
Playback without tone adjustment. This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On”. (v p. 159)
(Default): 0
0 You cannot set this when no audio signal is input or in the menu “HDMI Audio Out”
is set to “TV”. (v p. 163)

Displaying your desired video during 4 If you selected “On” in step 3, press i and select
audio playback (Video Select) “Source”.
This unit can display video from a different source on TV during audio
playback. You can set this for each input source.
5 Use o p to select the input source for video you want
to play back, then press ENTER.
n Supported input sources:
iPod/USB / Tuner / Online Music / Bluetooth 0 “Video Select” settings are stored for each input source.
1 Press OPTION during audio playback.

2 Use ui to select “Video Select”, then press ENTER.
3 Use o p to select the Video Select mode.
Off
Disable Video Select mode.
(Default):
On: Enable Video Select mode.

o Stopping the All Zone Stereo mode

Playing the same music in all zones (All
Zone Stereo) 1 During playback in All Zone Stereo mode, press
OPTION.
You can play back the music being played back in MAIN ZONE
simultaneously in ZONE2 (separate room). The option menu screen is displayed.
2
It is useful when you want to enjoy the same music at the same time in
Use ui to select “All Zone Stereo”, then press ENTER.
multiple rooms during home party or when you want to play back the same
BGM in the entire house.
3 Select “Stop”, then press ENTER.
1 Press OPTION.
2 Use ui to select “All Zone Stereo”, then press ENTER. 0 The All Zone Stereo mode is canceled even when the power supply of the MAIN
ZONE is turned off.
3
0 In the All Zone Stereo mode, only the “Multi Ch Stereo” and “Stereo” sound modes
Select “Start”, then press ENTER. can be selected.
The input source for ZONE2 is switched to the same input source as 0 When “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”, the All Zone Stereo mode is not available.
for MAIN ZONE, and playback starts in the All Zone Stereo mode. (v p. 163)

Selecting a sound mode

This unit allows you to enjoy various kinds of surround and stereo
playback modes.
Disc formats such as Blu-ray Disc and DVD, as well as being supported by
digital broadcasting, and even by streaming movies and music from
ZONE 2
ZO POWER
PO internet-based subscription services.
This unit supports playback of almost all of these multi-channel audio
ECO
LUME
VOLU
formats. It also supports surround playback of audio formats other than

SOU
OURC
RCE SLE
LEEP
DVD/
VD/
multi-channel audio such as 2-channel stereo audio.

CBL/SAT
BL/SAT Blu-ra
Blu-ray Blu-r
Bl -ray
MED
EDIA
GAME
GA AUX PLAY
PLAYER HANN
CHANNEL
iPod/
iPod/USB TV A
AUDI
DIO TUN
UNER
ONLIN
ONLINE
MUSIC Blu
luetoo
etooth
INTERNET
INTERNET
RADI
ADIO PAG
AGE
0 For audio formats recorded on a disc, see the disc jacket or label.
SOU
OUND
ND MO
MODE
MOVIE PURE
MUSIC INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION
GAME
ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
BACK SETUP
SET
ui UNE
TUN TUNE
TU MUTE
QUICK
K SE
SELECT
1 2 3 4
.
o Switching the sound mode

Selecting a sound mode
0 Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to display a list of the sound modes
that can be selected. Each time you press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME,
1 Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to select a sound mode. the sound mode changes.
0 While the list is displayed, you can also use ui to select a sound
Switches to the sound mode suitable for mode.
MOVIE :
enjoying movies and TV programs. 0 Try out various sound modes and enjoy sound mode in your favorite
Switches to the sound mode suitable for mode.
MUSIC :
enjoying music. GExampleH When MOVIE is pressed
Switches to the sound mode suitable for
GAME :
enjoying games.
MOVIE SOUND
Stereo
Dolby Surround
DTS Neural:X
0 The MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME button memorizes the last sound mode selected for Multi Ch Stereo
its button. Pressing MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME recalls the same sound mode as Mono Movie
the one selected at the previous playback.

Virtual
0 If the content played back does not support the previously selected sound mode,
the most appropriate sound mode for the content is automatically selected.
.
This unit provides not only sound modes that conform to the formats
recorded on discs such as Dolby and DTS, but also extended types of
modes that match your speaker configuration and “original sound modes”
that create atmosphere of Rock Arena and Jazz Club, etc.

Direct playback Pure Direct playback

Sound recorded in source is played as is. This mode is for playback with higher sound quality than in Direct playback
mode.
1 Press PURE to select “Direct”. This mode turns off the main unit display and analog video circuit. Doing
so suppresses noise sources that affect sound quality.
Direct playback begins.
1 Press PURE to select “Pure Direct”.

The display goes dark, and Pure Direct playback begins.
0 In Direct and Pure Direct sound modes, the following items cannot be adjusted.
0 Tone (v p. 116)
0 Restorer (v p. 156)
0 MultEQ® XT (v p. 159)
0 Dynamic EQ (v p. 159)
0 Dynamic Volume (v p. 160)
0 Manual EQ (v p. 161)
NOTE
0 Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the Pure Direct
mode.
0 When the Pure Direct mode has been selected, the display turns off after about 5
seconds.

Auto surround playback

This mode detects the type of input digital signal, and automatically
selects the corresponding mode for playback.
Perform stereo playback when the input signal is PCM. When the input
signal is Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the
respective channel number.
1 Press PURE to select “Auto”.

Auto surround playback begins.

o Description of sound mode types

Dolby sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Dolby Surround This mode uses Dolby Surround Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback.
Use ceiling speakers such as top middle speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.
Dolby Digital This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital.
Dolby TrueHD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby TrueHD.
Dolby Digital Plus This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital Plus.
Dolby Atmosz This mode can be selected when playing back content encoded with Dolby Atmos.
It decodes Dolby Atmos content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers,
creating natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers
to realize a three-dimensional sound field.
z This mode is not supported in a 5.1ch or less speaker configuration.

DTS sound mode

DTS Surround This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS.
DTS ES Dscrt6.1z This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.
The surround back channel added using the discrete method is played as an independent channel.
Since all channels are independent, the 360-degree spacial expressiveness and sound localization are enhanced.
DTS ES Mtrx6.1z This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.
The surround back channel added to the surround-left and surround-right channels by a matrix encoder at software
recording time is decoded by this unit’s matrix decoder and played from each channel (surround left, surround right,
surround back).
DTS 96/24 This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS 96/24.
DTS-HD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS-HD.
DTS Express This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS Express.
DTS:X This mode can be selected when playing back content encoded with DTS:X.
It decodes DTS:X content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers, creating
natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.
DTS Neural:X This mode uses DTS Neural:X Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback.
Use height speakers such as front height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.
z This can be selected when “Speaker Config.” - “Surround Back” is not set to “None”. (v p. 188)
PCM multi-channel sound mode

Multi Ch In This mode can be selected when playing multi-channel PCM sources.

Original sound mode

Multi Ch Stereo This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers.
Rock Arena This mode simulates the expansive sound of a live concert in an arena.
Jazz Club This mode simulates the experience of being in an intimate jazz club.
Mono Movie This mode works with monaural audio sources and delivers a surround sound effect. For optimum channel balance and
surround sound effects, connect the monaural source to both of the front (L/R) audio inputs.
Video Game This mode provides an exciting, dynamic surround sound effect with your favorite action video games.
Matrix This mode adds a spacious surround sound effect with stereo music sources.
Virtual This mode lets you experience an expansive surround sound effect when playing back through just the front (L/R)
speakers only, and when listening with stereo headphones.
Auto sound mode

Auto In this mode, the type of digital signal input, such as Dolby Digital, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital EX,
Dolby Atmos, DTS, DTS-HD, DTS:X, DTS-ES, PCM (multi-channel) is detected, and the playback mode switches
automatically to the corresponding mode.
If the input signal is analog or PCM (2-channel), stereo playback is used. For Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played
back according to the respective channel number.

Stereo sound mode

Stereo This mode plays 2-channel stereo audio with no additional surround sound processing.
0 Sound is output from the front left and right speakers, and subwoofer if connected.
0 When multi-channel signals are inputted, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and are played back with no
additional surround sound processing.
Direct sound mode

Direct This mode plays back audio as recorded in the source.
Pure Direct This mode plays back an even higher quality sound than the “Direct” mode.
The following circuits are stopped in order to further improve sound quality.
0 Display indicator circuit of the main body (display will go off.)
0 The analog video input/output switcher and processor is disabled.

o Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal

0 The following sound modes can be selected using the MOVIE, MUSIC and GAME buttons.
0 Adjust the sound field effect with the menu “Surr.Parameter” to enjoy surround sound the way you like it. (v p. 152)
.
Input signal Sound mode MOVIE button MUSIC button GAME button
Stereo S S S
Dolby Surround S S S
DTS Neural:X z2 S S S
Multi Ch Stereo S S S
Mono Movie S
2-channel z1
Rock Arena S
Jazz Club S
Matrix S
Video Game S
Virtual S S S
z1 2-channel also includes analog input.

z2 This mode plays back 2-channel sources in 5.1 or 7.1-channel playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used or when the speaker configuration is front
speakers only.

.
Multi-channel z3 Stereo S S S
Dolby Digital S S S
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital + Dolby Surround S S S
Dolby TrueHD S S S
Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD + Dolby Surround z4 S S S
Dolby Atmos z5 S S S
Dolby Digital Plus S S S
Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus + Dolby Surround z4 S S S
Dolby Atmos z5 S S S
Dolby Atmos Dolby Atmos S S S
DTS Surround S S S
DTS ES Dscrt 6.1 S S S
DTS DTS ES Mtrx 6.1 S S S
DTS 96/24 S S S
DTS + Neural:X S S S
z3 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels. For details, see “Types of input signals, and
corresponding sound modes” (v p. 245).
z4 This can be selected when the input signal does not contain Dolby Atmos.
z5 This can be selected when the input signal contains Dolby Atmos.

.
DTS-HD HI RES S S S
DTS-HD / DTS-HD MSTR S S S
DTS Express DTS Express S S S
DTS-HD + Neural:X S S S
DTS:X S S S
DTS:X
DTS:X MSTR S S S
Multi Ch In S S S
Multi Ch In 7.1 S S S
PCM multi-channel
Multi In + Dolby Surround S S S
Multi Ch In + Neural:X S S S
Multi Ch Stereo S S S
Mono Movie S
Rock Arena S
Multi-channel z3 Jazz Club S
Matrix S
Video Game S
Virtual S S S
z3 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels. For details, see “Types of input signals, and
corresponding sound modes” (v p. 245).

o Views on the display
+ S DVD
q w
.
A Shows a decoder to be used.
0 In the case of the Dolby Digital Plus decoder, “H” is displayed.
B Shows a decoder that creates sound output.

0 “k” indicates that the Dolby Surround decoder is being used.

HDMI control function

A recent addition to the HDMI standard is CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows control signals from one device to communicate with
another device via the HDMI cable connection.
Setting procedure
1 Enable the HDMI control function of this unit. 5 Switch the input source of this unit to check that video
from the player connected by HDMI is played back
Set “HDMI Control” to “On”. (v p. 165)
correctly.
2 Turn the power on for all the devices connected by
HDMI cable. 6 When you turn the TV’s power to standby, check that
the power of this unit also goes to standby.
3 Set the HDMI control function for all devices connected
by HDMI cable. NOTE
0 Please consult the operating instructions for the connected 0 Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player. Check
devices to check the settings. the owner’s manual of each device for details beforehand.
0 Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the devices be unplugged.
4 Switch the television input to the HDMI input connected

to this unit.

Smart Menu function

This function can be used to configure the settings of this unit, select an o Now Playing
input source and set Tuner and Internet Radio stations using the TV
remote control. Enjoy content from the input source currently selected on this unit.
1 Enable the HDMI control function of this unit and the

TV. (v p. 165)
o Source
Switch the input of this unit.
2 Set “Smart Menu” to “On” on this unit. (v p. 167) If you select “Online Music”, “iPod/USB” or “Tuner”, you can continue
to operate this unit using the TV remote control.
3 Select “AV Receiver” in a TV menu such as “Input”z or

“Operate Connected HDMI Device”z.
o Sound Mode
The Smart Menu of this unit is displayed on the TV. Change the sound mode of this unit.
0 This unit can be operated with the TV remote control while the You can select from the following three sound modes.
Smart Menu is displayed.
z The selection method differs depending on your TV. Surround sound playback according to
Surround:
the input signal.
Stereo: Stereo playback.
Smart Menu Multi Ch Stereo: Multi-channel stereo playback.
Now Playing Source Sound Mode Setup Menu

Blu-ray
Quick Select 1 Quick Select 2 Quick Select 3 Quick Select 4
Help
.
o Setup Menu
Displays a setup menu for configuring the settings of this unit.
o Quick Select
Calls up the QUICK SELECT items registered to this unit.
NOTE
0 If the “HDMI Control” or “Smart Menu” settings have been changed, always reset
the power to connected devices after the change.
0 The Smart Menu function may not work properly depending on the specifications
of your TV. In this case, set “Smart Menu” to “Off”. (v p. 167)

Sleep timer function

You can have the power automatically switched to standby once a set time
has elapsed. This is convenient for viewing and listening while going to
sleep.
ZONE 2
ZO POWER
PO
ECO
LUME
VOLU
SOU
OURC
RCE
CBL/SAT
BL/SAT
DVD/
VD/
Blu-ra
Blu-ray
SLE
LEEP
Blu-r
Bl -ray
SLEEP
MED
EDIA
GAME
GA AUX PLAY
PLAYER HANN
CHANNEL
iPod/
iPod/USB TV A
AUDI
DIO TUN
UNER
ONLIN
ONLINE INTERNET
INTERNET
MUSIC luetoo
Bluetooth RADI
ADIO PAG
AGE
SOU
OUND
ND MO
MODE
INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION
ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
BACK SETUP
SET
UNE
TUN TUNE
TU MUTE
QUICK
K SE
SELECT
1 2 3 4
.
o Checking the remaining time

Using the sleep timer
Press SLEEP when the sleep timer is in operation.
1
The remaining time appears on the display.
Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set.
0 The SLEEP indicator lights up on the display and the sleep timer o To cancel the sleep timer
starts.
0 You can set the sleep timer in the range from 10 to 120 minutes in Press SLEEP to select “Off”.
steps of 10 minutes. The SLEEP indicator on the display turns off.
0 The sleep timer setting is canceled when the unit switches to standby mode.
NOTE
0 The sleep timer function cannot turn off the power of devices connected to this
unit. To turn off the power of those connected devices, set up sleep timers on the
connected devices themselves.

Quick select plus function

Settings such as the input source, volume level and sound mode can be
registered to the QUICK SELECT 1 - 4 buttons.
You can simply press one of the registered QUICK SELECT buttons in
subsequent playbacks to switch to the group of saved settings in a batch.
ZONE 2
ZO POWER
PO By saving frequently used settings at the QUICK SELECT 1 – 4 buttons,
you will always be able to easily call up the same playback environment.
ECO
LUME
VOLU
The Quick select plus function can only be set for the MAIN ZONE.
SOU
OURC
RCE SLE
LEEP
DVD/
VD/
CBL/SAT
BL/SAT Blu-ra
Blu-ray Blu-r
Bl -ray
MED
EDIA
GAME
GA AUX PLAY
PLAYER HANN
CHANNEL
iPod/
iPod/USB TV A
AUDI
DIO TUN
UNER
ONLIN
ONLINE INTERNET
INTERNET
MUSIC Blu
luetoo
etooth RADI
ADIO PAG
AGE
SOU
OUND
ND MO
MODE
INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION
ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
BACK SETUP
SET
UNE
TUN TUNE
TU MUTE
QUICK
K SE
SELECT QUICK SELECT
1–4
1 2 3 4
.
Calling up the settings
1 Press QUICK SELECT.

The Quick Select settings registered to the button you pressed are
called up.
0 The default settings for the input source and volume are as shown
below.
GMAIN ZONEH
Button Input source Volume
QUICK SELECT 1 CBL/SAT 40
QUICK SELECT 2 DVD/Blu-ray 40
QUICK SELECT 3 Media Player 40
QUICK SELECT 4 Online Music 40

Changing the settings 2 Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT until
“Quickz Memory” appears on the display.
1 Set the items below to the settings you want to
register.
The current settings will be memorized.
z is displayed the number for the QUICK SELECT button you
The following settings from A to G can be memorized for MAIN pressed.
ZONE, and settings A and B can be memorized for ZONE2.
o Changing the Quick Select Name
A Input source (v p. 64)
B Volume (v p. 65) The MAIN ZONE Quick Select name displayed on the TV screen or
C Sound mode (v p. 119) display of this unit can be changed to a different name.
D Audyssey (Audyssey MultEQ® XT, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, For the name change method, see “Quick Sel.Names”. (v p. 208)
Audyssey Dynamic Volume®) (v p. 158)
E “Restorer” (v p. 156)
F “Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Ch Level Adjust)” (v p. 115)
G “Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
0 Press and hold QUICK SELECT while a radio station is being received or a
track is being played back with any of the following sources, the current
radio station or track is memorized.
0 Tuner / Internet Radio / Media Server / Pandora / SiriusXM / Favorites /
iPod/USB

Web control function

You can control this unit from a web control screen on a web browser.
Controlling the unit from a web control
PC Router
1
This unit
Switch the “Network Control” setting to “Always On”.
(v p. 202)
2 Check the IP address of this unit with “Information”.

(v p. 196)
Network/Information
Friendly Name Denon AVR-X1300W
DHCP On
Connection Wired(Ethernet)
IP Address 192.168.100.19
MAC Address zzzzzz-000000
Checking the IP address.

Tablet
.
0 This unit and the PC or tablet need to be connected correctly to the network in
.
order to use the web control function. (“Connecting to a home network
(LAN)” (v p. 59))
0 Depending on the settings of your security-related software, you may not be able
3 Start up the web browser.
to access this unit from your PC. If this is the case, then change the settings of the
security-related software.

4 Enter the IP address of this unit in browser’s address

box.
5 When the top menu is displayed, click on the menu
item you want to operate.
For example, if the IP address of this unit is “192.168.100.19”, enter
“http://192.168.100.19”. Setup Menu
MAIN ZONE
Audio CBL/SAT
http://192.168.100.19 Video ZONE2

CBL/SAT
File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Inputs
.
Speakers
Network
General
Save Load
.
0 You can use the “Save” and “Load” functions to store or recall various function
settings using web control from a PC.
0 To memorize settings, click “Save” on the Setup Menu screen.
0 To call up settings, click “Load” on the Setup Menu screen.
0 We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
Internet Explorer 10 and above
Mozilla Firefox 24 and above
Google Chrome 29 and above
Safari 5.x and above

Playback in ZONE2 (Separate room)

You can operate this unit to enjoy audio in a room (ZONE2) that is different from the room where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE).
You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2. You can also play back separate sources in the MAIN ZONE
and ZONE2.
Connecting ZONE2
You can use the following two methods to play back audio in ZONE2.
o Connection 1: Connecting using a speaker
0 “Connecting using a speaker output terminal” (v p. 141)
output terminal
0 “Connecting using an external amplifier” (v p. 142)
When “Assign Mode” is set to “ZONE2” in the menu, ZONE2 audio is
output from the SURROUND BACK speaker terminal. (v p. 185)
MAIN ZONE
This unit
(R) (L)
ZONE2
.
o Connection 2 : Connection using an external

amplifier (ZONE2)
The audio signals of this unit’s ZONE2 audio output connectors are
output to the ZONE2 amplifiers and played on these amplifiers.
MAIN ZONE ZONE2
This unit
Power amplifier
L
AUX IN
.
Playback in ZONE2 1 Press ZONE2 X to turn on the ZONE2 power.

The ( indicator on the display lights.
0 Power in ZONE2 can be turned on or off by pressing ZONE2
ON/OFF on the main unit.
2
ZONE2 X ZONE 2
ZO POWER
PO Press ZONE2 SOURCE to select the input source to be
played.
ECO
VOLU
LUME
ZONE2 SOU
OURC
RCE
DVD/
VD/
SLE
LEEP
The audio signal of the selected source is output to ZONE2.

SOURCE
CBL/SAT
BL/SAT Blu-ra
Blu-ray Blu-r
Bl -ray
GAME
GA AUX
MED
EDIA
HANN
CHANNEL ZONE2 0 To perform an operation with the main unit, press ZONE2
SOURCE. Each time you press ZONE2 SOURCE, the input
PLAY
PLAYER
VOLUME df
iPod/
iPod/USB TV A
AUDI
DIO TUN
UNER
source changes.
ONLIN
ONLINE INTERNET
INTERNET
MUSIC luetoo
Bluetooth RADI
ADIO PAG
AGE
SOU
OUND
ND MO
MODE
INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION
ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
BACK SETUP
SET
UNE
TUN TUNE
TU MUTE
K SE
QUICK SELECT
1 2 3 4
.
o Adjusting the volume (ZONE2)

Use ZONE2 VOLUME df to adjust the volume.
0 At time of purchase, “Volume Limit” is set to “70 (–10 dB)”.
(v p. 207)
0 Turn MASTER VOLUME after pressing ZONE2 SOURCE on the main unit to
adjust the volume.

Menu map
When using menu operations, connect this unit to a TV and operate this unit while viewing the TV.
The recommended settings are configured for this unit by default. You can customize this unit based on your existing system and your preferences.
Setting items Detailed items Description Page
Dialog Level This setting adjusts the output level to clarify the dialogue output from the center 151
channel.
Subwoofer Level This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer. 151
Surr.Parameter Adjusts surround sound parameters. 152
.
Audio Restorer Expands the low and high frequency components of compressed audio content such as 156
MP3 files to enable richer audio playback.
Audio Delay Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio. 157
Volume Sets the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting. 157
Audyssey Makes Audyssey MultEQ® XT, Audyssey Dynamic EQ® and Audyssey Dynamic 158
Volume® settings.
Manual EQ Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker. 161
HDMI Setup Makes settings for HDMI audio output, HDMI Pass Through and HDMI Control settings. 163
On Screen Disp. Configures the on-screen display settings. 168
TV Format Sets the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using. 169
.
Video


Input Assign Changes input connector assignment. 170
Source Rename Changes the display name for input source. 172
Hide Sources Removes from the display input sources that are not used. 172
Source Level Adjusts the playback level of the audio input. 172
.
Inputs Input Select Sets the audio input mode. 173
Audyssey® Setup The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are 174
measured and the optimum settings are made automatically.
Manual Setup Sets up the speakers manually or changes the Audyssey® Setup settings. 185
.
Speakers
Information Displays network information. 196
Connection Selects whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a wired LAN. 196
Settings Used for manually setting the IP address or when using a proxy server. 200
. Network Control Enables network communication in standby power mode. 202
Network Friendly Name The “Friendly Name” is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change 202
the Friendly Name according to your preferences.
Diagnostics Used to check the network connection. 203


Language Changes the language of the display on the TV screen. 204
ECO Configures the ECO Mode and Auto Standby energy-saving functions. 204
ZONE2 Setup Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2. 207
Zone Rename Changes the display title of each zone to one you prefer. 208
.
General Quick Sel.Names Changes the Quick Select Name display title to one you prefer. 208
Front Display Makes settings related to the display on this unit. 208
Firmware Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades, updates the 209
firmware, and sets up the notification message display.
Information Shows information about this unit settings, input signals, etc. 211
Usage Data Selects whether or not to send anonymous usage data to Denon. 213
Setup Lock Protects settings from inadvertent changes. 213
Begin Setup... Performs basic installation/connections/settings from the beginning according to the Page 8 of
guidance indicated on the TV screen. the separate
Language Select Sets individual setting items according to the guidance displayed on the TV screen. manual
“Quick Start
. Speaker Setup Guide”
Setup Assistant Sp.Calibration
Network Setup
TV Audio Connect
Input Setup

Menu operations
ZONE 2
ZO POWER
PO 1 Press SETUP.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
ECO
LUME
VOLU
2
SOU
OURC
RCE SLE
LEEP
Use ui p to select the menu to be set or operated,

DVD/
VD/
CBL/SAT
BL/SAT Blu-ra
Blu-ray Blu-r
Bl -ray
then press ENTER.

MED
EDIA
GAME
GA AUX PLAY
PLAYER HANN
CHANNEL
3
iPod/
iPod/USB TV A
AUDI
DIO TUN
UNER
ONLIN
ONLINE
MUSIC luetoo
Bluetooth
INTERNET
INTERNET
RADI
ADIO PAG
AGE
Use o p to change to desired setting.
MOVIE
SOU
OUND
ND MO
MUSIC
MODE
GAME PURE
4 Press ENTER to enter the setting.
0 To return to the previous item, press BACK.
0 Exiting the menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed. The
INF
NFO OPTIO
OP ION
uio p ENTER
ENT VOLU
VOLUME
menu display disappears.
ENTER
BACK BACK SETUP
SET
SETUP
UNE
TUN TUNE
TU MUTE
QUICK
K SE
SELECT
1 2 3 4
.
Inputting characters
On this unit, you can change the name displayed on the following screens to the names that you prefer.
0 Preset Name (v p. 84)
0 Text Search (v p. 112)
0 Source Rename (v p. 172)
0 Friendly Name (v p. 202)
0 Zone Rename (v p. 208)
0 Quick Sel.Names (v p. 208)
0 Character input for the network functions

Using the keyboard screen
1 Display the screen for inputting characters. 3 Press ENTER to move the cursor to the character that
you wish to change.
GExampleH “Source Rename” screen
0 Each time ENTER is pressed, the cursor moves by one
character.
Source Rename
4 Select a character to be input with uio p then press

CBL/SAT CBL/SAT
Clear Insert Delete

A B C D E F G H I J K L M
ENTER.
5
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! “ # Repeat steps 2 - 4 to change the name.
$ % & ‘ ( ) z+ , ; < = >
6
a/A Space Cancel OK
Use uio p to select “OK”, then press ENTER.

.
2 Use uio p to select , or ..

Audio
Make audio-related settings.
Dialog Level Subwoofer Level

This setting adjusts the output level to clarify the dialogue output from the This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer.
center channel.
o Adjustment
o Adjustment
Set whether to adjust the subwoofer level.
Set whether to adjust the dialog level or not.
Enables the adjustment of the subwoofer
On:
Enables the adjustment of the dialog level.
On:
level. Off Disables the adjustment of the subwoofer
Off Disables the adjustment of the dialog (Default): level.
(Default): level.
o Subwoofer Level
o Level
Adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer.
Adjusts the volume output from the center channel.
–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)
–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

Surr.Parameter o Loudness Mngmt

This sets whether to output as specified in “Dynamic Comp.” or output
You can adjust the surround audio sound field effects to match your
directly without compressing the dynamic range of audio recorded in
preferences.
the disc.
The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being
input and the currently set sound mode. For details on the adjustable Outputs are given based on enabling the
On
parameters, see “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 242). settings made in “Dynamic Comp.” and
(Default):
Dialogue normalization function.
“Dynamic Comp.” settings and Dialogue
0 Some setting items cannot be set while playback is stopped. Make the settings Off: normalization are disabled, and the
during playback. signals on the disc are output as is.
0 “Surr.Parameter” settings are stored for each sound mode.
o Cinema EQ 0 “Loudness Mngmt” can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD and Dolby Atmos signal is input.
Gently softens the upper treble range of movie soundtracks to reduce
possible harshness and improve clarity.
On: “Cinema EQ” is used.
Off
“Cinema EQ” is not used.
(Default):

o Dynamic Comp. o Low Frequency

Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds). Adjust the low frequency effects level (LFE).
Automatic dynamic range compression
Auto: -10 dB – 0 dB (Default : 0 dB)
on/off control according to source.
Low / Medium / High: These set the compression level.
Dynamic range compression is always
Off: 0 For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting to the
off.
values below.
0 Dolby Digital sources : 0 dB
0 DTS movie sources : 0 dB
0 “Dynamic Comp.” can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby 0 DTS music sources: -10 dB
TrueHD, Dolby Atmos or DTS signal is input.
0 The default setting is “Off”. When the input signal is the Dolby TrueHD or
Dolby Atmos source, the default setting is “Auto”.
0 “Auto” cannot be set when inputting a DTS signal.
o Dialog Control
Adjust the volume of dialog in movies, vocals in music, etc. so these
can be heard more easily.
0 – 6 (Default : 0)
0 This can be set when a DTS:X signal that is compatible with the Dialog Control
function is input.

o Center Spread o Delay Time

Center spread expands the center channel signal to left and right front Adjust the audio delay time against video to extend the sound field
speakers to create a wider frontal audio image for the listener. It is image.
optimized and designed primary for playback of stereo music content.
0 ms – 300 ms (Default : 30 ms)
On: Use “Center Spread”.
Off
Do not use “Center Spread”.
(Default): 0 You can set this when the sound mode is “Matrix”.
o Effect Level
0 You can set this when sound mode is “Dolby Surround”.
Adjust the sound effect level of the current sound mode.
1 – 15 (Default : 10)
o DTS Neural:X
DTS Neural:X Expands the non-object based audio signals and
optimizes them for your speaker configuration. 0 Set to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the surround
On signals seems unnatural.
Use “DTS Neural:X”.
(Default):
Off: Do not use “DTS Neural:X”.
0 You can set this when sound mode is “DTS:X” or “DTS:X MSTR”.

o Room Size o Subwoofer

Determine size of acoustic environment. Turn subwoofer output on and off.
Small: Simulate acoustics of a small room. On
The subwoofer is used.
Simulate acoustics of a medium-small (Default):
Medium small:
room. Off: The subwoofer is not used.
Medium
Simulate acoustics of a medium room.
(Default) :
Simulate acoustics of a medium-large 0 You can set this when the sound mode is “Direct” or “Stereo” and in the menu
Medium large: “Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 194)
room.
Large: Simulate acoustics of a large room.
o Set Defaults
0 “Room Size” does not indicate the size of the room in which sources are The “Surr.Parameter” settings are returned to the default settings.
played.

Restorer
Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio) 0 This item can be set with analog signals or PCM signal (Sample Rate =
44.1/48 kHz) is input.
and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal
components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The “Restorer” 0 This item default setting for “Online Music”, “iPod/USB” and “Bluetooth” is
“Low”. All others are set to “Off”.
function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the
0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression.
0 “Restorer” settings are stored for each input source.
It also restores the original bass characteristics for a rich and expanded
tonal range.
o Mode
Optimized mode for compressed sources
High: with very weak highs (64 kbps and
under).
Apply suitable bass and treble boost for
Medium: all compressed sources (96 kbps and
under).
Optimized mode for compressed sources
Low:
with normal highs (96 kbps and over).
Off: Do not use “Restorer”.

Audio Delay Volume

Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio. Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.
o Scale
0 “Audio Delay” settings are stored for each input source.
Set how volume is displayed.
o Auto Lip Sync 0 - 98
Display in the range 0 (Min) to 98.
(Default):
Automatically adjusts the audio processing time to compensate for
Display ---dB (Min), in the range –79.5 dB
delays in audio/video timing from TV compatible with Auto Lip Sync. –79.5 dB – 18.0 dB:
to 18.0 dB.
On
Correct automatically.
(Default):
Off: Do not correct automatically. 0 “Scale” settings are reflected in all the zones.
o Limit
0 Automatic correction may not be performed depending on the specifications of Make a setting for maximum volume.
your TV even when “Auto Lip Sync” is set to “On”.
60 (–20 dB) / 70 (–10 dB) / 80 (0 dB)
o Adjust Off (Default)
The timing mismatch between the picture and sound needs to be
corrected manually.
0 ms – 500 ms (Default : 0 ms) 0 The dB value is displayed when the “Scale” setting is “ –79.5 dB – 18.0
dB”. (v p. 157)
0 You can also finely adjust the delay correction value set by “Auto Lip Sync”.

o Power On Level
Audyssey®
Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
Set Audyssey MultEQ® XT, Audyssey Dynamic EQ® and Audyssey
Last Use the memorized setting from the last Dynamic Volume®. These can be selected after Audyssey® Setup has
(Default) : session. been performed.
Always use the muting on condition when For additional information on Audyssey technology, please see
Mute:
power is turned on. “Explanation of terms” (v p. 248).
1 – 98 (–79 dB – 18 dB) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.
0 “MultEQ® XT”, “Dynamic EQ”, “Ref.Lev.Offset” and “Dynamic Volume” settings are
stored for each input source.
0 The dB value is displayed when the “Scale” setting is “ –79.5 dB – 18.0
0 When the sound mode is in the “Direct” or “Pure Direct” mode, “MultEQ® XT”,
dB”. (v p. 157)
“Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” settings cannot be configured.
o Mute Level
Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
Full
The sound is muted entirely.
(Default):
–40 dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
–20 dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.

o MultEQ® XT o Dynamic EQ
MultEQ® XT compensates for both time and frequency characteristics Solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is
of the listening area based on Audyssey® Setup measurement results. decreased by taking into account human perception and room
Selection is done from three types of compensation curves. We acoustics.
recommend the “Reference” setting. Works with MultEQ® XT.
Selects the default calibrated setting with On
Reference Use Dynamic EQ.
a slight roll off at high frequencies, which (Default):
(Default):
is optimized for movies. Off: Do not use Dynamic EQ.
Selects the reference setting, but
L/R Bypass: bypasses MultEQ® XT on the front left
and right speakers.
0 When the menu “Dynamic EQ” setting is “On”, it is not possible to do “Tone”
Selects the calibrated setting which is adjustment. (v p. 116)
optimized for small rooms where your
Flat:
listening position is closer to the
speakers.
Off: Do not use “MultEQ® XT”.
0 When using headphones, “MultEQ® XT” is automatically set to “Off”.

o Ref.Lev.Offset o Dynamic Volume

Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is referenced to the standard film mix level. It Solves the problem of large variations in volume level between TV,
makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround movies and other content (between quiet passages and loud
envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, passages, etc.) by automatically adjusting to the user’s preferred
film reference level is not always used in music or other non-film volume setting.
content. Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides three offsets Most adjustment to softest and loudest
from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be Heavy:
sounds.
selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard.
Recommended setting levels for content are shown below. Medium adjustment to loudest and
Medium:
softest sound.
0 dB (Film Reference) Optimized for content such as movies. Least adjustment to loudest and softest
(Default): Light:
Select this setting for content that has a sounds.
5 dB : very wide dynamic range, such as Off
classical music. Do not use Dynamic Volume.
(Default):
Select this setting for jazz or other music
that has a wider dynamic range. This
10 dB : setting should also be selected for TV
content as that is usually mixed at 10 dB 0 If “Dynamic Volume” is set to “Yes” in “Audyssey® Setup”, the setting is
below film reference. automatically changed to “Medium”. (v p. 174)
Select this setting for pop/rock music or
other program material that is mixed at
15 dB : very high listening levels and has a
compressed dynamic range.
0 Setting is enabled when “Dynamic EQ” is “On”. (v p. 159)

Manual EQ o Speaker Select

Select whether to adjust tones for individual speakers or for all
Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.
speakers.
All: Adjust all speaker tones together.
0 Speakers for which “Manual EQ” can be set differ according to the sound mode. Left/Right Adjust the left and right speaker tones
0 This can be set when the “MultEQ® XT” setting is “Off”. (v p. 159) (Default) : together.
0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
Each: Adjust the tone for each speaker.
0 If you are using headphones, you can set the equalizer for headphones.
(v p. 161)
o Manual EQ / Headphone EQ
Set whether to use the graphic equalizer or not.
On: Use the graphic equalizer.
Off
Do not use the graphic equalizer.
(Default):
0 “Headphone EQ” is set in the menu when headphones are used.

o Adjust EQ o Curve Copy

Adjust tonal balance for each frequency band. Copy the Flat correction curve created in the Audyssey® Setup.
1. Select the speaker.
2. Select the adjustment frequency band.
0 “Curve Copy” is displayed after Audyssey® Setup has been performed.
63 Hz / 125 Hz / 250 Hz / 500 Hz / 1 kHz / 2 kHz / 4 kHz / 8 kHz /
0 “Curve Copy” cannot be used when using headphones.
16 kHz
3. Adjust the level.
–20.0 dB – +6.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB) o Set Defaults
The “Manual EQ” settings are returned to the default settings.
0 Front Dolby and Surround Dolby speakers can only be set when
63 Hz/125 Hz/250 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz.

Video
Make video-related settings.
HDMI Setup o HDMI Audio Out

Select HDMI audio output device.
Make settings for HDMI audio output, HDMI Pass Through and HDMI
Control settings. AVR Play back through speakers connected to
(Default): the unit.
NOTE
Play back through TV connected to the
0 When “HDMI PassThrough” and “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, it consumes more TV:
unit.
standby power. (“HDMI PassThrough” (v p. 164), “HDMI Control” (v p. 165))
If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is recommended that you
unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
0 When the HDMI control function is activated, priority is given to the TV audio
setting. (v p. 131)
0 When the power of this unit is on and “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”, audio is
output as 2-channel from the HDMI OUT connector.

o HDMI PassThrough o RC Select

Selects how this unit will transmit HDMI signals to the HDMI output in Set whether to allow this unit to be turned on by the input source select
standby power mode. button on the remote control when this unit is on standby.
Transmits the selected HDMI input Power On+Source The power of this unit is turned on and
On
through the AV receiver’s HDMI output (Default): the input source changes.
(Default):
when this unit is in standby power mode. The HDMI input source changes while
No HDMI signals are transmitted through this unit is on standby. The power display
Off: this unit’s HDMI output in standby power Source Only: of this unit blinks when the input source
mode. select button of the remote control is
pressed.
o Pass Source
Sets the HDMI connector that inputs HDMI signals when in standby. 0 “RC Select” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On” or “HDMI
PassThrough” is set to “On”. (“HDMI PassThrough” (v p. 164), “HDMI
The most recently used input source will
Last: Control” (v p. 165))
go into standby mode.
CBL/SAT /
DVD/Blu-ray / Blu-ray /
Game / AUX / Pass through the selected input source.
Media Player
(Default : CBL/SAT)：
0 “Pass Source” can be set when “HDMI PassThrough” is set to “On” or “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. (“HDMI PassThrough” (v p. 164), “HDMI
Control” (v p. 165))

o HDMI Control o ARC

You can link operations with devices connected to HDMI and On the TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR connector, set whether
compatible with HDMI Control. to receive sound from the TV via HDMI.
On: Use HDMI control function. On: Use ARC function.
Off Off
Do not use HDMI control function. Do not use ARC function.
0 Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to check 0 You can adjust the volume of this unit using the TV remote control.
the settings. 0 If using this function, use a TV compatible with ARC (Audio Return Channel)
0 Refer to “HDMI control function” for more information about the HDMI control and enable the HDMI control function of the TV.
function. (v p. 131) 0 When “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, the “ARC” settings automatically switch
“On”. (v p. 165)
NOTE
0 If the “HDMI Control” settings have been changed, always reset the power to NOTE
connected devices after the change. 0 If the “ARC” settings have been changed, always reset the power to
connected devices after the change.

o TV Audio Switching o Pow.Off Control

Sets automatic switching to the “TV Audio” input when a TV connected Links the power standby of this unit to external devices.
via HDMI sends an appropriate CEC control command to the AVR.
If power to a connected TV is turned off
All
On Select the “TV Audio” input automatically independently of the input source, power
(Default):
(Default): when receiving a command from the TV. to this unit is automatically set to standby.
Do not select the “TV Audio” input With an input source being selected that
Off: automatically when receiving a command is assigned either “HDMI” or “VIDEO”,
Video: when you turn the power of the TV off,
from the TV.
power to this unit is automatically set to
standby. (v p. 171)
Off: This unit does not link with power to a TV.
0 “TV Audio Switching” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
(v p. 165)
0 “Pow.Off Control” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. (v p. 165)

o Power Saving o Smart Menu

If “TV Speaker” is set as the audio output setting of your TV, this unit is This function can be used to configure the settings of this unit, select
automatically set to standby mode to reduce power consumption. an input source and set Tuner and Internet Radio stations using the TV
This function is activated in the following cases. remote control.
0 When “TV Audio” is selected as the input source of this unit On: Use Smart Menu function.
0 When playing content from a device connected by HDMI Off: Do not use Smart Menu function.
On: Use Power Saving function.
Off
Do not use Power Saving function.
(Default): 0 “Smart Menu” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. (v p. 165)
NOTE
0 “Power Saving” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. (v p. 165) 0 If the “Smart Menu” settings have been changed, always reset the power to
connected devices after the change.
0 The Smart Menu function may not work properly depending on the
specifications of your TV. In this case, set “Smart Menu” to “Off”.

On Screen Disp. o Now Playing

Sets the display time for the playback display when the input source is
Select the on-screen display user interface preferences.
“Online Music”, “iPod/USB”, “Bluetooth” or “Tuner”.
o Volume Always On
Show display continuously.
(Default) :
Sets where to display the volume level. Show display for 30 seconds after
Auto Off:
Bottom operation.
Display at the bottom.
(Default):
Top: Display at the top.
Off: Turn display off.
0 When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed text
(closed captioning) or movie subtitles are present, set to “Top”.
o Info
Displays status of operation temporarily when the input source is
switched.
On
Turn display on.
(Default):
Off: Turn display off.

TV Format
Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.
o Format
NTSC
Select NTSC output.
(Default):
PAL: Select PAL output.
0 “Format” can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu
screen is not displayed. Following the display content to make the setting.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s ZONE2 SOURCE and STATUS at the same
time for at least 3 seconds.
“V.Format:<NTSC>” appears on the display.
2. Use the main unit’s TUNER PRESET CH + or TUNER PRESET CH - and
set the video signal format.
3. Press the main unit’s STATUS to complete the setting.
NOTE
0 When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the
picture will not be displayed properly.

Inputs
Perform settings related to input source playback.
You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.
Input Assign
0 By default, each item is set as follows.
By making connections as indicated by the input sources printed on the
Input connector
audio/video input connectors of this unit, you can just press one of the Input source
input source select buttons to easily play back audio or video from a HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG VIDEO
connected device. CBL/SAT 1 COAX 1 1
Please change the assignment of the HDMI input connector, digital audio DVD/Blu-ray 2 – – –
input connector, analog audio input connector and video input connector
Blu-ray 4 – – –
when connecting an input source that differs from that printed to the audio/
video input connectors of this unit. Game 5 – – –
Media Player 3 OPT2 2 2
Input Assign TV Audio – OPT1 – –
Set Defaults HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG VIDEO
AUX FRONT – – –
CBL/SAT 1 COAX 1 1
DVD/Blu-ray
DVD 2 − − −
Blu-ray
Game
4
5
−
−
−
−
−
−
n TV set top box/satellite users please note
Media Player 3 OPT2 2 2
TV Audio − OPT1 − − When using the digital audio output on a TV/satellite box:
To play the video signal assigned to “HDMI” combined with the audio
AUX FRONT − − −
signal assigned at “Input Assign” - “DIGITAL”, you will also need to

select “Digital” in the “Input Mode”. (v p. 173)
.
o HDMI o ANALOG
Set this to change the HDMI input connectors assigned to the input Set this to change the analog audio input connectors assigned to the
sources. input sources.
1/2/3/4/5/ Assign an HDMI input connector to the Assign a analog audio input connector to
1/2:
FRONT: selected input source. the selected input source.
Do not assign an HDMI input connector Do not assign a analog audio input
–: –:
connector to the selected input source.
to the selected input source.
o VIDEO
0 When “HDMI Control” or “ARC” is set to “On” in the menu, “HDMI” cannot be
Set this to change the composite video input connectors assigned to
assigned to “TV Audio”. (v p. 165)
the input sources.
0 No information on changing the volume or sound mode is displayed when the
4K signal is input. Assign the video input connector to the
1 / 2:
selected input source.
Do not assign a video input connector to
o DIGITAL –:
the selected input source.
Set this to change the digital audio input connectors assigned to the
input sources.
o Set Defaults
COAX (Coaxial) / Assign a digital audio input connector to
OPT1 (Optical) / OPT2: the selected input source. The “Input Assign” settings are returned to the default settings.
Do not assign a digital audio input

–:
connector to the selected input source.

Source Rename Hide Sources

Change the display name for input source. Remove from the display input sources that are not used.
This is convenient when the name of your device and the input source Show
name of this unit are different. You can change the name to suit your Use this source.
(Default) :
needs. When the renaming is completed, the name is displayed on this
unit’s display and on the menu screen. Hide: Do not use this source.
CBL/SAT / DVD/Blu-ray /
Blu-ray / Game / AUX / Change the display name for input source.
Media Player / TV Audio: 0 The “Bluetooth” function can be disabled by setting Bluetooth to “Hide”.
The Source Rename settings are returned

Set Defaults:
to the default settings. Source Level
This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s
audio input.
0 Up to 12 characters can be input. For character input, see “Using the keyboard
Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels
between the different sources.
-12 dB – +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)
0 “Source Level” settings are stored for each input source.

Input Select
Set the audio input mode of each input source.
The input modes available for selection may vary depending on the input
source.
0 “Input Select” settings are stored for each input source.
o Input Mode
Set the audio input modes for the different input sources.
It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to “Auto”.
Auto Automatically detect input signal and
(Default): perform playback.
HDMI: Play only signals from HDMI input.
Digital: Play only signals from digital audio input.
Analog: Play only signals from analog audio input.
0 When digital signals are properly input, the ~ indicator lights on the display.
If the ~ indicator does not light, check “Input Assign” and the connections.
(v p. 170)
0 If “HDMI Control” is set to “On” and a TV compatible with the ARC is
connected via the HDMI MONITOR connectors, the input mode whose input
source is “TV Audio” is fixed to ARC.

Speakers
The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. This is called
“Audyssey® Setup”.
You do not have to perform Audyssey® Setup when you have already performed “Sp.Calibration” in “Setup Assistant”.
To set up the speakers manually, use “Manual Setup” on the menu. (v p. 185)
Audyssey® Setup
To perform measurement, place the Sound calibration microphone in FL SW C FR FL Front speaker (L)
multiple locations all around the listening area. For best results, we
FR Front speaker (R)
recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the
C Center speaker
illustration (up to eight positions). ( :Measuring positions) SW Subwoofer
When measuring the second and subsequent positions, install the Sound
SL Surround speaker (L)
calibration microphone within 2 ft (60 cm) of the first measurement position
SR Surround speaker (R)
(main listening position).
0 If you perform the Audyssey® Setup, the Audyssey MultEQ® XT, Audyssey
Dynamic EQ® and Audyssey Dynamic Volume® functions are enabled. SL Listening position SR
(v p. 158)
.
o About the main listening position NOTE

The main listening position is the position where listeners would 0 Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room
normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening measurements. Close windows and turn off the power on electronic devices
(radios, air conditioners, fluorescent lights, etc.). The measurements could be
environment. Before starting Audyssey® Setup, place the Sound
affected by the sounds emitted by such devices.
calibration microphone in the main listening position.
0 During the measurement process, place cell phones outside the listening room.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT uses the measurements from this position to Cell phone signals could disrupt the measurements.
calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover 0 Do not stand between the speakers and Sound calibration microphone or allow
value for the subwoofer. obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. Also, install the
Sound calibration microphone at least 20 inches (50 cm) away from the wall.
Failure to do so will result in inaccurate readings.
0 During the measurement process, audible test tones will come from the speakers
and subwoofer(s), but this is part of normal operation. If there is background noise
in the room, these test signals will increase in volume.
0 Operating VOLUME d f on the remote control unit or MASTER VOLUME on the
main unit during the measurements will cancel the measurements.
0 Measurement cannot be performed when headphones are connected. Unplug the
headphones before performing Audyssey® Setup.

Procedure for speaker settings 1 Attach the Sound calibration microphone to the
supplied microphone stand or own tripod and install it
(Audyssey® Setup) at the main listening position.
When installing the Sound calibration microphone, point the tip of
Preparation the microphone toward the ceiling and adjust the height to match the
height of the ears of a listener in a seated position.
Measurement
2 If using a subwoofer capable of the following
adjustments, set up the subwoofer as shown below.
n When using a subwoofer with a direct mode
Set the direct mode to “On” and disable the volume adjustment
Calculation & Store and crossover frequency setting.
n When using a subwoofer without a direct mode

Check Make the following settings:
0 Volume : 12 o’clock position
0 Crossover frequency : Maximum/Highest Frequency
0 Low pass filter : Off
Finish 0 Standby mode : Off
.
3 Connect the Sound calibration microphone to the

SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
4 Select “Next”, then press ENTER.
Audyssey Setup
Set the following items if necessary.
Amp Assign
Channel Select
Dolby Sp.Setup
When the Sound calibration microphone is Start
connected, the following screen is displayed. Back
.
.
Audyssey Setup
Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of
your room then optimize your speakers using the included
microphone and mic stand.
Back Next
.
5 Select “Start”, then press ENTER. 6 Follow the instructions on the screen display and press
“Next” to proceed further.
Audyssey® Setup can also make the following settings.
7
0 Amp Assign
When the following screen is displayed, select “Begin
The signals output from the SURROUND BACK speaker
Test” and then press ENTER.
terminals can be switched in accordance with your speaker
environment. (“Amp Assign” (v p. 185)) Start the measurement of the first position.
0 Channel Select
If channels that are not to be used are set in advance, Audyssey Setup
measurement for the set channels is skipped, and measuring Select “Begin Test” to Start the Calibration.
NOTE:You will hear a series of loud test tones
time can be reduced. You can also change the number of starting and stopping during the tests.
surround back speakers.

0 Dolby Sp.Setup
Set the distance between the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker and Ear Height
the ceiling.
This can be set when “Assign Mode” is set to “Front Dolby” or
“Surround Dolby” in the “Amp Assign” settings. (v p. 185) Back Begin Test
.
0 Measurement requires several minutes.
NOTE
0 If “Caution!” is displayed on TV screen:
0 Go to “Error messages” (v p. 183). Check any related items, and
perform the necessary procedures.

8 When the detected speaker is displayed, select “Next”

and then press ENTER.
9 Move the Sound calibration microphone to position 2,
select “Continue”, then press ENTER.
The measurement of the second position starts.
Audyssey Setup Measurements can be made in up to eight positions.
Speaker Detection
Front Yes Audyssey Setup

Center Yes
Place the microphone ear level at the 2nd listening position,
Subwoofer Yes which should be no more than 2ft (60cm) away from the 1st
Surround Yes position, then select “Continue”...
Surr.Back No
Ear Height
Repeat Last Test Next
.
Back Continue
.
n Stopping Audyssey® Setup
A Press BACK to display the popup screen.
B Press o to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.

10 Repeat step 9, measuring positions 3 to 8. 12 Perform the settings for Audyssey Dynamic EQ® and
Audyssey Dynamic Volume®.
The following screen is displayed during the analysis. Configure the
0 To skip measuring the fourth and subsequent listening position, press o to settings as preferred.
select “Complete” and press ENTER to proceed to step 12.
11 Select “Continue”, then press ENTER. Audyssey Setup

Audyssey Dynamic EQ maintains bass, clarity and surround
sound at low volumes letting you enjoy late-night movies
and television.
Audyssey Setup
Turn on the Dynamic EQ?
Measurements Complete
Select “Continue” to analyze the data... Yes
No
Analyzing room data

0%
.
Repeat Last Test Continue
Audyssey Setup
.
Start the analysis and storage of the measurement results.
Audyssey Dynamic Volume automatically adjusts
volume to deliver the perfect levels for day
0 Analysis takes several minutes to complete.

or night listening.
The more speakers and measurement positions that there are,

Turn on the Dynamic Volume?
the more time it takes to perform the analysis. Yes

No
NOTE Analyzing room data

50%
0 When the measurement results are being saved, make sure the power is Back
not turned off.
.
0 Dynamic EQ corrects the frequency response in consideration of

the audio characteristics of the room and human hearing ability so
13 When the analysis and storage ends, unplug the Sound
calibration microphone from the SETUP MIC jack on the
that sound can be heard even at low volume. main unit and then press “Next”.
This is recommended when using the unit with the volume turned
down, e.g. when enjoying a movie or TV program in the middle of
the night.
Audyssey Setup
Now Analyzing and correcting the your room data.
0 Dynamic Volume adjusts the output volume to the optimal level
while constantly monitoring the level of the audio input to the unit.
Optimal volume control is performed automatically without any
loss in the dynamism and clarity of the sound when, for example,
the volume suddenly increases for commercials shown during
television programs. Analyzing room data
Back Next
.
14 Select “Details” and press ENTER to verify the

measurement results.
0 Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than the
actual distance due to added electrical delay common in
subwoofers.
NOTE
0 Do not change the speaker connection or subwoofer volume after Audyssey®
Setup. If these are changed, run Audyssey® Setup again in order to configure the
optimum equalizer settings.

Error messages
An error message is displayed if Audyssey® Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If an error
message is displayed, check the relevant items and perform the necessary measures. Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.
Examples Error details Measures
No speakers found. 0 Sound calibration microphone is not 0 Connect the included Sound calibration microphone to the
detected. SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
0 Not all speakers could be detected. 0 Check the speaker connections.
Ambient noise is too high or level is too 0 There is too much noise in the room. 0 Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away.
low 0 Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.
0 Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low. 0 Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the
speakers are facing.
0 Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.
Front R : None 0 The displayed speaker could not be 0 Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
detected.
Front R : Phase 0 The displayed speaker is connected with the 0 Check the polarity of the displayed speaker.
polarity reversed. 0 For some speakers, this error message may be displayed
even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure the
connection is correct, press p to select “Ignore”, then press
ENTER.

Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings

If you set “Restore...” to “Restore”, you can return to Audyssey® Setup
measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ® XT) even
when you have changed each setting manually.
Audyssey Setup
Set the following items if necessary.
Amp Assign
Channel Select
Dolby Sp.Setup
Check Results
Restore...
Start
Back
.
Manual Setup Amp Assign

Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings Select the power amplifier usage method to match your speaker system.
made in Audyssey® Setup. See “Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings” (v p. 36)
0 If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey® Setup, regarding the speaker configuration and connection.
you will no longer be able to select Audyssey MultEQ® XT, Audyssey
Dynamic EQ® or Audyssey Dynamic Volume®. (v p. 158) o Assign Mode
0 “Manual Setup” can be used without changing the settings. Please set if Select how to use the power amp.
necessary.
Setting for 7.1-channel playback using
Surround Back:
surround back speakers.
Front Height:
front height speakers.
Top Front:
top front speakers.
Top Middle:
top middle speakers.
Front Dolby:
front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.
Surround Dolby: surround Dolby Atmos Enabled
speakers.

ZONE2
Setting to assign the unit’s built-in power
amplifier for ZONE2 and output the audio
Speaker Config.
(Default):
in stereo. Select whether or not speakers are present, playback capacity for low
Setting to use the front speakers via the bass frequencies and speaker size.
Bi-Amp:
bi-amp connection. o Front
Setting for playback using a second front
speaker. You can switch the playback Set the front speaker size.
between front speaker A and B according Large Use a large speaker that can adequately
Front B:
to your liking. Switch the front speaker (Default): play back very low bass frequencies.
using “Front Speaker” in the menu.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
(v p. 195)
Small: playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
0 When “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to “Large”.

0 When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Center”, “Surround”, “Surround Back” and
“Front Height” can not be set to “Large”.

o Center o Surround
Set the presence and size of the center speaker. Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.
Use a large speaker that can adequately Use a large speaker that can adequately
Large: Large:
play back very low bass frequencies. play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate Use a small speaker that has inadequate
Small Small
playback capacity for very low bass playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies. frequencies.
Select when a center speaker is not Select when the surround speakers are
None: None:
connected. not connected.
o Subwoofer
0 When “Surround” is set to “None”, “Surround Back” and “Surround Dolby” are
Set the presence of a subwoofer. automatically set to “None”.
Yes
Use a subwoofer.
(Default):
Select when a subwoofer is not
No:
connected.

o Surround Back o Front Height

Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers. Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.
Large: Large:
Small Small
Select when the surround back speakers Select when the front height speakers are
None: None:
are not connected. not connected.
2 spkrs
Use two surround back speakers. 0 When “Assign Mode” setting is “Front Height”, you can make this setting.
(Default):
(v p. 185)
Use only one surround back speaker.
1 spkr: Connect to the L terminal to SURROUND
BACK when this setting is selected.
0 When “Assign Mode” setting is “Surround Back”, you can make this setting.
(v p. 185)

o Top Front o Top Middle

Set the presence and size of the top front speakers. Set the presence and size of the top middle speakers.
Large: Large:
Small Small
Select when the top front speakers are Select when the top middle speakers are
None: None:
not connected. not connected.
0 When “Assign Mode” setting is “Top Front”, you can make this setting. 0 When “Assign Mode” setting is “Top Middle”, you can make this setting.
(v p. 185) (v p. 185)

o Front Dolby o Surround Dolby

Set the presence and size of the front Dolby speakers. Set the presence and size of the surround Dolby speakers.
Large: Large:
Small Small
Select when the front Dolby speakers are Select when the surround Dolby
None: None:
not connected. speakers are not connected.
0 When “Assign Mode” setting is “Front Dolby”, you can make this setting. 0 When “Assign Mode” setting is “Surround Dolby”, you can make this setting.
(v p. 185) (v p. 185)

Distances o Set the distance

Set distance from listening position to speakers. 0.0 ft – 60.0 ft / 0.00 m – 18.00 m
Measure beforehand the distance from the listening position to each
speaker.
0 The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the “Amp Assign” and
o Unit “Speaker Config.” settings. (“Amp Assign” (v p. 185), “Speaker
Config.” (v p. 186))
Set the unit of distance. 0 Default settings :
Front L / Front R / Front Height L / Front Height R / Center / Front Dolby L /
Feet (Default) Front Dolby R / Subwoofer: 12.0 ft (3.60 m)
Meters Surround L / Surround R / Surround Back L / Surround Back R / Top Front L /
Top Front R / Top Middle L / Top Middle R / Surround Dolby L / Surround
Dolby R: 10.0 ft (3.00 m)
o Step 0 Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 20.0 ft
Set the minimum variable width of the distance. (6.00 m).
1 ft / 0.1 ft (Default: 1 ft)

0.1 m / 0.01 m

o Dolby Sp.Setup Levels

Set the distance between the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker and the
Set the volume of the test tone to be the same at the listening position
ceiling.
when it is output from each speaker.
3.0 ft - 11.0 ft / 0.90 m - 3.30 m (Default : 6.0 ft)
o Test Tone Start
A test tone is output from the selected speaker.
0 This can be set when “Front Dolby” or “Surround Dolby” is set to “Large” or
“Small” in “Speaker Config.”. While listening to the test tone, adjust the volume output from the
selected speaker.
o Set Defaults –12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)
The “Distances” settings are returned to the default settings.

0 The set “Levels” are reflected in all sound modes.
0 If you wish to adjust the channel level for each input source, carry out the
settings in “Ch Level Adjust” (v p. 115).
0 When headphones are connected to the PHONES connector on this unit, you
cannot set “Levels”.
o Set Defaults
The “Levels” settings are returned to the default settings.

Crossovers o Set the crossover frequency

Set in accordance with the lower limit frequency of the base frequencies 40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz /
that can be played back through each speaker. See the speaker manual 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default : 80 Hz)
for information concerning speaker crossover frequency.
o Speaker Select 0 “Crossovers” can be set when the “Subwoofer Mode” setting is “LFE+Main”, or
when you have a speaker that is set to “Small”. (v p. 194)
Selects how to set the crossover frequency. 0 The default crossover frequency is “80 Hz”, which will work best with the
All Sets the same crossover frequency for all widest variety of speakers. We recommend setting to a higher frequency that
the crossover frequency when small speakers are used. For example, set to
(Default): speakers.
“250 Hz” when the frequency range of the speakers is 250 Hz – 20 kHz.
Selects the crossover points for each 0 Sound below the crossover frequency is cut off from the output of the
Individual:
speaker individually. speakers set in “Small”. This cut off bass frequency is output from the
subwoofer or front speakers.
0 The speakers that can be set when “Individual” is selected differ depending on
to the “Subwoofer Mode” setting. (v p. 194)
0 When “LFE” is selected, speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker Config.” can be
set. If the speakers are set to “Large”, “Full Band” is displayed and the
setting cannot be made. (v p. 186)
0 When “LFE+Main” is selected, speakers can be set regardless of the
“Speaker Config.” setting. (v p. 186)

Bass o LPF for LFE

Set LFE signal playback range. Set this when you want to change the
Set subwoofer and LFE signal range playback.
playback frequency (low pass filter point) of the subwoofer.
o Subwoofer Mode 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz /
200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default : 120 Hz)
Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.
The low range signal of the channel set to
LFE
“Small” speaker size is added to the LFE
(Default):
signal output from the subwoofer.
The low range signal of all channels is
LFE+Main: added to the LFE signal output from the
subwoofer.
0 “Subwoofer Mode” can be set when “Speaker Config.” - “Subwoofer” is set to

other than “No”. (v p. 187)
0 Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass.
0 If “Speaker Config.” - “Front” and “Center” are set to “Large”, and “Subwoofer
Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output from the subwoofers,
depending on the input signal or selected sound mode. (v p. 186) Select
“LFE+Main” if you want the bass signals to always be produced from the
subwoofer.

Front Speaker
Set the front speaker A/B to use for every sound mode.
A
Front speaker A is used.
(Default):
B: Front speaker B is used.
A+B : Both front speakers A and B are used.
0 This can be set when “Assign Mode” is set to “Front B”. (v p. 185)

Network
To use this unit by connecting it to a home network (LAN), you must configure network settings.
If you set up your home network (LAN) via DHCP, set “DHCP” to “On”. (Use the default setting.) This allows this unit to use your home network (LAN).
When assigning an IP address to each device manually, you need to assign an IP address to this unit using the “IP Address” settings, and enter
information about your home network (LAN) such as the gateway address and subnet mask, etc.
Information Connection
Display network information. Choose whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a
wired LAN.
Friendly Name / Connection / SSID / DHCP / IP Address / When connecting to the network using wired LAN, select
MAC Address “Wired(Ethernet)” after connecting a LAN cable,
When connecting to the network using wireless LAN, select “Wireless(Wi-
Fi)” and configure the “Wi-Fi Setup”. (v p. 197)
0 MAC Address is required to create a vTuner account. o Wi-Fi

You can stop the Wi-Fi function when connecting this unit to the
network using Wired LAN.
Enabled
The Wi-Fi function is used.
(Default):
Disabled: The Wi-Fi function is stopped.

o Connect Using Wi-Fi Setup

Select the method for connecting to the home network (LAN).
Connect to a wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) router.
Wired(Ethernet): Use a LAN cable to connect to a network. The router can be connected in the following ways. Select the connection
Wireless(Wi-Fi) Use the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) function to method to suit your home environment.
(Default): connect to a network.
o Scan Networks
Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of possible
networks shown on the TV screen.
0 This can be set when “Wi-Fi” is set to “Enabled”. (v p. 196)
1. Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of wireless
networks.
Select “Rescan” if the network cannot be found.
2. Enter your password and select “OK”.
o Use iOS Device

Use your iOS device (iPhone/iPod/iPad) to connect to the network. By
connecting your iOS device to this unit, the unit can be automatically
connected to the same network as your device.
This unit can be connected to your iOS device in two ways, using a
USB cable and using Wi-Fi.

n When connecting using Wi-Fi o WPS Router

1. Select “Wireless connection” on the TV screen. Use a WPS-compatible router to connect.
2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN There are two ways to connect, using the push button method or the
(Wi-Fi) router and select “Denon AVR-X1300W” from “SET UP PIN code method. Select the connection method to match your router.
NEW AIRPLAY SPEAKER...” at the bottom of the Wi-Fi
configuration screen of your iOS device. n When connecting using the push button method
3. Tap “Next” on the screen of the iOS device.
1. Select “Push Button” on the TV screen.
2. Switch to the WPS mode by pressing the WPS button of the
0 The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS 7 or later. router you wish to connect to.
0 The time for pressing the button varies depending on the
n When using a USB cable router.
3. Select “Connect” on the TV screen within 2 minutes.
1. Select “USB cable” on the TV screen.
2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN n When connecting using the PIN code method
(Wi-Fi) and connect it to the USB port on the front panel using a
USB cable. 1. Select “PIN” on the TV screen.
3. Select “Connect” on the TV screen. 2. Register the PIN code of the unit in the router.
4. Tap “Allow” when the connection message appears on the
screen of your iOS device.
0 The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS 5 or later.

o Manual
Enter the name (SSID) and password of the network you wish to 0 The wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) settings of this unit can also be configured from a PC or
connect to. tablet that supports wireless LAN connection.
When using a device that has a firmware version of iOS 7 or later, “When
1. Set the following items.
connecting using Wi-Fi” (v p. 198) in “Use iOS Device”.
Input the name of the wireless network 1. Press and hold the DIMMER and STATUS buttons on the main unit for at least 3
SSID:
(SSID). seconds when the power of the unit is on.
2. Connect the wireless LAN of the PC or tablet used to “Denon AVR-X1300W”
Select the encryption method according
when the message “Connect your Wi-Fi device to Wi-Fi network called “Denon
Security: to the encryption setting of the access AVR-X1300W”” appears in the display.
point you are using. 3. Start up the browser and enter “192.168.1.16” in the URL.
Password: Input the password. 4. Use the browser to enter the settings, select “Connect” and then exit the
settings.
Select the Default Key.
When connecting to a “WEP” encrypted
Default Key:
network, “Default Key” menu is
displayed.
2. Select “Connect” at the end of the setting.

Settings o DHCP
Selects how to connect to the network.
Configure the proxy settings and IP address.
0 If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), the information On Configure the network settings
required for network connection such as the IP address will be (Default): automatically from your router.
automatically configured since the DHCP function is set to “On” in the Off: Configure the network settings manually.
default settings of this unit.
0 Set up the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS server o IP Address
information only when assigning a fixed IP address or when connecting
Set the IP address within the ranges shown below.
to a network without DHCP function.
0 The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses
0 Configure the proxy settings when using a proxy server to connect to
are set.
the Internet.
CLASS A:10.0.0.1 - 10.255.255.254
CLASS B:172.16.0.1 - 172.31.255.254
CLASS C:192.168.0.1 - 192.168.255.254
Settings
DHCP Off
o Subnet Mask
-IP Address 192. 168. 001. 002
-Subnet Mask 255. 255. 255. 000
-Default Gateway 192. 168. 001. 001
When connecting an xDSL modem or connector adapter directly to

-Primary DNS 192. 168. 001. 001
-Secondary DNS 000. 000. 000. 000
Proxy On(Address) this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation
supplied by your provider. Normally input 255.255.255.0.
-Name 000. 000. 000. 000
-Port 00000
Save
Cancel
.
o Default Gateway o Port

When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address. Enter port number.
o Primary DNS, Secondary DNS

0 If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings.
If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation (v p. 59)
supplied by your provider, input it at “Primary DNS”. If two or more
0 If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP (Internet
DNS are provided by your provider, enter both “Primary DNS” and Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your computer.
“Secondary DNS”.
o Proxy
Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server.
Make the proxy settings only when you connect to the Internet via a
proxy server that is on your internal network or provided by your
provider, etc.
On(Address): Select when inputting by address.
On(Name): Select when inputting by domain name.
Off
Disables the proxy server.
(Default):

Network Control Friendly Name

Enables network communication in standby power mode. The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You
can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.
Off In Standby: Suspend network function during standby.
Always On
Network is on during standby. Main unit o Name
operable with a network compatible
(Default) : Selects Friendly Name from the list.
controller.
When you select “Other”, you can change the Friendly Name
according to your preferences.
0 When using the web control function or Denon 2016 AVR Remote App, use with Home Theater / Living Room / Family Room / Guest Room /
the “Network Control” setting set to “Always On”. Kitchen / Dining Room / Master Bedroom / Bedroom / Den /
Office / Other
NOTE
0 When “Network Control” is set to “Always On”, the unit consumes more standby
power. 0 Up to 63 characters can be input.
For character input, see “Using the keyboard screen” (v p. 150).
0 The default Friendly Name on first use is “Denon AVR-X1300W”.
o Set Defaults
Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default
setting.

Diagnostics o Internet Access

Checks whether this unit has access to the Internet (WAN).
Used to check the network connection.
OK
o Physical Connection Failed to connect to the Internet. Check
Error: the Internet connection environment or
Checks the physical LAN port connection.
router settings.
OK
The LAN cable is not connected. Check
Error:
the connection.
0 When connected using a wireless LAN, “Connection Wireless(Wi-Fi)” will be

displayed.
o Router Access
Checks the connection from this unit to the router.
OK
Failed to communicate with the router.
Error:
Check the router settings.

General
Make various other settings.
Language ECO
Set the language for display the menu on the TV screen. Configure the settings of the ECO Mode and auto standby mode.
English / Français / Español (Default : English)
o ECO Mode
This mode can reduce the power consumption when the power of the
0 “Language” can also be set up by the following operation. However, the menu unit is on.
screen is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the settings.
On: Reduce the power consumption.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s ZONE2 SOURCE and STATUS at the same time
for at least 3 seconds. The power consumption is automatically
Auto:
“V.Format:< NTSC>” appears on the display. reduced to match the volume.
2. Press the main unit’s DIMMER. Off
“Lang.:<ENGLISH >” appears on the display. Do not reduce the power consumption.
(Default):
3. Use the main unit’s TUNER PRESET CH + or TUNER PRESET CH - and set
the language.
4. Press the main unit’s STATUS to complete the setting.
0 When you want to output audio at a high volume level, it is recommended to
set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
0 Eco mode can also be switched by pressing ECO on the remote control unit.

o Pow.On Default o On Screen Disp.

Set the mode to ECO when the power is on. Display the power consumption of this unit using a meter on the TV
screen.
The ECO Mode will be set to the previous
Last
setting before the power was switched Always display the meter on the TV
(Default) : Always On:
off. screen.
When power is turned on, the mode will Auto Display the meter when changing the
On: always be switched to the ECO Mode in (Default): mode or volume.
“On”. Off: Do not display the meter.
When power is turned on, the mode will
Auto: always be switched to the ECO Mode in
“Auto”.
When power is turned on, the mode will
Off: always be switched to the ECO Mode in
“Off”.

o Auto Standby n ZONE2

Set so the unit power automatically switches to standby. When there are no operations for a certain period of time as set here,
the power is automatically shut off even if there is audio or video input.
n MAIN ZONE
Switches ZONE2 in the standby state
8 hours:
Sets the time for switching to auto standby when there are no audio or after about 8 hours.
video signals input into this unit. Switches ZONE2 in the standby state
Before the unit enters standby mode, “Auto Standby” is displayed on 4 hours:
after about 4 hours.
the unit display and the menu screen.
Switches ZONE2 in the standby state
60 min: The unit goes into standby after 60 minutes. 2 hours:
after about 2 hours.
30 min: The unit goes into standby after 30 minutes. Off Does not automatically switch ZONE2 to
15 min: The unit goes into standby after 15 minutes. (Default): the standby state.
Off The unit does not go into standby
(Default): automatically.

ZONE2 Setup o Volume Limit

Make a setting for maximum volume.
Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2.
60 (-20 dB) / 70 (-10 dB) / 80 (0 dB)
(Default : 70 (-10 dB))
0 Values set for “Volume Limit” and “Pow.On Volume” are displayed according to the Off: Do not set a maximum volume.
setting specified for the volume “Scale” (v p. 157).
o Volume Level
0 This can be set when “Volume Level” is set to “Variable”. (v p. 207)
Set the volume output level. 0 The dB value is displayed when the “Scale” setting is “ –79.5 dB – 18.0 dB”.
(v p. 157)
Variable
Volume can be adjusted.
(Default) : o Pow.On Volume
Volume is fixed at the desired level. The Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
1 – 98
volume cannot be adjusting using the
(–79.5 dB – 18.0 dB): Last Use the memorized setting from the last
remote control unit.
(Default) : session.
Mute: Always mute when power is turned on.
0 The dB value is displayed when the “Scale” setting is “ –79.5 dB – 18.0 dB”. 1 – 98
(v p. 157) The volume is adjusted to the set level.
(–79.5 dB – 18.0 dB):
0 This can be set when “Volume Level” is set to “Variable”. (v p. 207)

0 The dB value is displayed when the “Scale” setting is “ –79.5 dB – 18.0 dB”.
(v p. 157)

Zone Rename Front Display

Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer. Makes settings related to the display on this unit.
MAIN ZONE / ZONE2
o Dimmer
The default setting is restored for the edited
Set Defaults: Adjust the display brightness of this unit.
zone name.
Bright
Normal display brightness.
(Default) :
0 Up to 10 characters can be input. Dim: Reduced display brightness.
Dark: Very low display brightness.
Off: Turns the display off.
Quick Sel.Names
Change the quick select name that appears on the TV screen to one you
prefer. 0 You can also adjust the display by pressing DIMMER on the main unit.
Quick Select 1 / Quick Select 2 / Quick Select 3 / Quick Select 4

The default setting is restored for the edited
Set Defaults:
quick select name.
0 Up to 16 characters can be input.


Firmware Display Description

Please check your The network connection is unstable.
Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades, network, then try again Connection to the server failed.
updates the firmware, and sets up the notification message display for Check your network environment and try
updates and upgrades. the update again.
o Update Please check your The download of the firmware failed.
network, unplug and Check your network environment.
Updates the firmware of this unit. reconnect the power Press and hold the X on the main unit for
cord, and try again more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-
Execute the update process. When the
insert the power cord.
update starts, the menu screen is shut
Update: The update restarts automatically.
down. During the update, the progress is
shown on the display. Please try again The update failed.
Try the update again.
Please unplug and The update failed.
reconnect the power Press and hold the X on the main unit for
0 This unit automatically retries updating if updating fails. If an update still cord, and try again more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-
cannot be performed, an "Update Error" message appears in the display, insert the power cord.
followed by one of the following messages. Check the conditions according to
The update restarts automatically.
the message and try the update again.
Please contact customer This unit may be broken.
service in your area Contact our Customer Service Center in
your area.

o Notifications o Add New Feature

When the latest firmware is available, a notification message is Display new features that can be downloaded to this unit and perform
displayed on the TV screen at power on. an upgrade.
The notification message is displayed for about 40 seconds when the Upgrade Package: Display the items to be upgraded.
power is turned on.
Display a list of the additional functions
Upgrade Status:
Update provided by the upgrade.
On Execute the upgrade process.
Display update message.
(Default): When the upgrade starts, the menu
Off: Do not display update message. Upgrade Start: screen is shut down. During the upgrade,
the amount of upgrade time which has
elapsed is displayed.
Upgrade
On
Display upgrade message.
(Default):
0 See the Denon website for details about upgrades.
Off: Do not display upgrade message. 0 When the procedure is complete, “Registered” is displayed in this menu and
upgrades can be carried out. If the procedure has not been carried out, “-------”
is displayed.
The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out the
procedure.
The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding the main unit’s
TUNER PRESET CH + and STATUS for at least 3 seconds.
0 If the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those in
“Firmware” - “Update” will appear on the display. Check the settings and
network environment and then perform the upgrade again.

Notes concerning use of “Update” and “Add New Feature” Information

0 In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system
requirements and settings for an Internet connection. (v p. 59) Show information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.
0 Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrading is completed.
o Audio
0 Approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/upgrading procedure
to be completed. Show the audio information for MAIN ZONE.
0 Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot Sound Mode: The currently set sound mode.
be performed until updating/upgrading is completed. Furthermore, Input Signal: The input signal type.
there may be cases where backup data is reset for the parameters,
etc., set on this unit. The number of input signal channels
Format:
(presence of front, surround, LFE).
0 If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the X on the main unit for
more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. “Update Sample Rate: The input signal’s sampling frequency.
retry” appears on the display and update restarts from the point at The dialogue normalization correction
which update failed. If the error continues despite this, check the Offset:
value.
network environment.
This is displayed when inputting signals
including a surround back channel.
Flag: “MATRIX” is displayed with DTS-ES
0 Information regarding the “Update” function and “Add New Feature” will be Matrix input signals, “DISCRETE” with
announced on the Denon website each time related plans are defined. DTS-ES Discrete signals.

o Video o Notifications
Show the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI monitor information for Displays and sets notifications.
MAIN ZONE. Also, sets whether or not to display the notification when the power is
turned on.
HDMI Signal
Resolution / Color Space / Pixel Depth Notif.Alerts
On
Notification messages are displayed.
HDMI Monitor (Default):
Interface / Resolutions Off: Notification messages are not displayed.
o ZONE
0 Press INFO on the remote control unit to display current source name, volume,
Show information about current settings. sound mode name, and other information at the bottom of the screen.
This item shows information about
settings for MAIN ZONE. The information
MAIN ZONE:
displayed differs according to the input
source. SOURCE Blu-ray
This item shows information about Dolby TrueHD

SOURCE
ZONE2: SIGNAL Dolby TrueHD

settings for ZONE2. AUDYSSEY MultEQ XT : Reference
Dynamic EQ : On
Dynamic Volume : Medium
o Firmware
INPUT SIGNAL ACTIVE SPEAKERS
FHL LFE EXT FHR SW
FWL FL C FR FWR FL C FR
SL SR SL SR
SBL SB SBR SBL SBR
Displays information for the current

−40.0dB
Version:
firmware.
.
DTS Version: Displays the current DTS version.

Usage Data Setup Lock

To help us improve our products and customer service, Denon collects Protect settings from inadvertent changes.
anonymous information about how you use your AV receiver (such as
frequently used input sources and sound modes and speaker settings). o Lock
Denon will never provide any information we collect to third parties.
On: Turn protection on.
Provide information on the operating status
Yes: Off
of this unit. Turn protection off.
(Default):
Do not provide information on the operating
No:
status of this unit.
0 When cancelling the setting, set “Lock” to “Off”.
NOTE
0 When “Lock” is set to “On”, no setting items are displayed except for “Setup
Lock”.

o Contents
Troubleshooting
Power does not turn on / Power is turned off 218
Tips Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit 219
I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake 215 Display on this unit shows nothing 219
I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on 215 No sound comes out 220
I want to have the subwoofer always output audio 215 Desired sound does not come out 221
I want to make human voices in the movies clearer 215 Sound is interrupted or noise occurs 223
I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume No video is shown on the TV 224
level 215
The menu screen is not displayed on the TV 225
I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content
such as TV and movies 215 iPod cannot be played back 226
I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the USB memory devices cannot be played back 227
configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new File names on the iPod/USB memory device are not displayed
one 216 properly 228
I want to combine a desired video with the current music 216 Bluetooth cannot be played back 228
I want to skip unused input sources 216 The Internet radio cannot be played back 229
I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc. 216 Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back 230
I want to operate this unit using the TV remote control 216 Various online services cannot be played 230
The HDMI control function does not work 231
Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network 232

Tips
I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake
0 Set the volume upper limit for “Volume Limit” in the menu beforehand. This prevents children or others from increasing the volume too much by mistake.
You can set this for each zone. (“Volume” (v p. 157), “Volume Limit” (v p. 207))
I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on
0 By default, the volume setting when power was previously set to standby on this unit is applied at next power on with no change. To use a fixed volume
level, set the volume level at power on for “Pow.On Volume” in the menu. You can set this for each zone. (“Volume” (v p. 157), “Pow.On
Volume” (v p. 207))
I want to have the subwoofer always output audio
0 Depending on the input signals and sound mode, the subwoofer may not output audio. When “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”, you
can have the subwoofer always output audio. (v p. 194)
I want to make human voices in the movies clearer
0 Use “Dialog Level” in the menu to adjust the level. (v p. 151)
I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume level
0 Set “Dynamic EQ” in the menu to “On”. This setting corrects the frequency characteristics to allow you to enjoy clear sound without the bass being lost
even during playback at a lower volume level. (v p. 159)
I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies
0 Set “Dynamic Volume” in the menu. Volume level changes (between quiet scenes and loud scenes) in TV shows or movies are automatically adjusted
to your desired level. (v p. 160)

I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new
one.
0 Perform Audyssey® Setup. This automatically makes the optimized speaker settings for the new listening environment. (v p. 174)
I want to combine a desired video with the current music

0 Set “Video Select” in the option menu to “On”. You can combine the current music with your desired video source from a Set-top a Box or DVD, etc.
while listening to music from the Tuner, Internet radio, USB or Bluetooth. (v p. 117)
I want to skip unused input sources
0 Set unused input sources for “Hide Sources” in the menu. This allows you to skip unused input sources when turning the SOURCE SELECT knob on
this unit. (v p. 172)
I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc.
0 Set “All Zone Stereo” in the option menu to “Start”. This allows you to simultaneously play back the music that is being played back in MAIN ZONE in
ZONE2. (v p. 118)
I want to operate this unit using the TV remote control
0 Select “AV Receiver” in a TV menu such as “Input”z or “Operate Connected HDMI Device”z. The Smart Menu of this unit is displayed on the TV. This
Smart Menu can be operated using the remote control of your TV.
z The selection method differs depending on your TV. See the owner's manual of your TV for details.

Troubleshooting
If a problem should arise, first check the following:
1. Are the connections correct?
2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner’s manual?
3. Are the other devices operating properly?
If this unit does not operate properly, check the corresponding symptoms in this section.
If the symptoms do not match any of those described here, consult your dealer as it could be due to a fault in this unit. In this case, disconnect the power
immediately and contact the store where you purchased this unit.

o Power does not turn on / Power is turned off

Symptom Cause / Solution Page
Power does not turn on. 0 Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power outlet. 62
Power automatically turns 0 The sleep timer is set. Turn on the power again. 134
off. 0 “Auto Standby” is set. “Auto Standby” is triggered when there is no operation for a set amount of time. To 206
disable “Auto Standby”, set “Auto Standby” on the menu to “Off”.
Power turns off and the 0 The protection circuit has been activated due to a rise in temperature within this unit. Turn the power off, 256
power indicator flashes in wait about an hour until this unit cools down sufficiently, and then turn the power on again.
red approx. every 2 0 Please re-install this unit in a place having good ventilation. －
seconds.
Power turns off and the 0 Check the speaker connections. The protection circuit may have been activated because speaker cable 32
power indicator flashes in core wires came in contact with each other or a core wire was disconnected from the connector and
red approx. every 0.5 came in contact with the rear panel of this unit. After unplugging the power cord, take corrective action
seconds. such as firmly re-twisting the core wire or taking care of the connector, and then reconnect the wire.
0 Turn down the volume and turn on the power again. 64
0 This unit’s amplifier circuit has failed. Unplug the power cord and contact our customer service center. －
Power does not turn off 0 The power supply of ZONE2 is turned to ON. To turn off the power supply of this unit (standby), press the －
even when the power ZONE2 ON/OFF on the main unit, or press the X button on the remote control unit to turn off the power
button is pressed, and the supply of ZONE2.
display shows “ZONE2
On”.

o Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit

Operations cannot be 0 Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries. 8
performed through the 0 Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 23 ft/7 m from this unit and at an angle of within 8
remote control unit. 30°.
0 Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control unit. －
0 Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and w marks. 8
0 The set’s remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb －
light, etc.). Move the set to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light.
0 When using a 3D video device, the remote control unit of this unit may not function due to effects of －
infrared communications between units (such as TV and glasses for 3D viewing). In this case, adjust the
direction of units with the 3D communications function and their distance to ensure they do not affect
operations from the remote control unit of this unit.
o Display on this unit shows nothing

Display is off. 0 Set “Dimmer” on the menu to something other than “Off”. 208
0 When the sound mode is set to “Pure Direct”, the display is off. 121

o No sound comes out

No sound comes out of 0 Check the connections for all devices. 25
speakers. 0 Insert connection cables all the way in. －
0 Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected. －
0 Check cables for damage. －
0 Check that speaker cables are properly connected. Check that cable core wires come in contact with the 32
metal part on speaker terminals.
0 Securely tighten the speaker terminals. Check speaker terminals for looseness. 32
0 Check that a proper input source is selected. 64
0 Adjust the volume. 65
0 Cancel the mute mode. 65
0 Check the digital audio input connector setting. 170
0 Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, the digital audio output －
is set to off by default.
0 When a headphone is plugged into the PHONES jack on the main unit, sound is not output from the －
speaker terminal and SUBWOOFER connector.
No sound comes out when 0 When this unit is connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector, no sound is output. Make a －
using the DVI-D separate audio connection.
connection.

o Desired sound does not come out

The volume does not 0 The maximum volume is set too low. Set the maximum volume using “Limit” on the menu. 157
increase. 0 Appropriate volume correction processing is performed according to the input audio format and settings, －
so the volume may not reach the upper limit.
No sound comes out with 0 Check the connection of the HDMI connectors. 48
the HDMI connection. 0 When outputting HDMI audio from the speakers, set “HDMI Audio Out” on the menu to “AVR”. To output 163
from the TV, set “TV”.
0 When using the HDMI control function, check that the audio output is set to the AV amplifier on the TV. 131
No sound comes out of a 0 Check that speaker cables are properly connected. －
specific speaker. 0 Check that a selection other than “None” is set for the “Speaker Config.” setting in menu. 186
0 Check the “Assign Mode” setting in the menu. 185
0 When the sound mode is “Stereo” and “Virtual”, audio is only output from the front speakers and －
subwoofer.
No sound is produced from 0 Check the subwoofer connections. －
subwoofer. 0 Turn on the subwoofer’s power. －
0 Set “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer” on the menu to “Yes”. 187
0 When “Speaker Config.” - “Front” in the menu is set to “Large”, depending on the input signal and the 186
sound mode, no sound may be output from the subwoofer.
0 When no subwoofer audio signal (LFE) is included in the input signals, no sound may be output from the 194
subwoofer.
0 You can make the subwoofer always output sound by setting the “Subwoofer Mode” to “LFE+Main”. 194
DTS sound is not output. 0 Check that the digital audio output setting on the connected device is set to “DTS”. －
Dolby Atmos, Dolby 0 Make HDMI connections. 52
TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby 0 Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, “PCM” is set by default. －
Digital Plus audio is not
output.


DTS Neural:X mode cannot 0 DTS Neural:X cannot be selected when using the headphones. －
be selected.
Dolby Surround mode 0 Dolby Surround cannot be selected when using the headphones. －
cannot be selected.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT, 0 These cannot be selected when you have not performed Audyssey® Setup. 174
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® 0 Switch to a sound mode other than “Direct” or “Pure Direct”. 121
and Audyssey Dynamic
0 These cannot be selected when using the headphones. －
Volume® cannot be
selected.
“Restorer” cannot be 0 Check that an analog signal or PCM signal (Sample Rate = 44.1/48 kHz) is input. For playback of 156
selected. multichannel signals such as Dolby Digital or DTS surround, “Restorer” cannot be used.
0 Switch to a sound mode other than “Direct” or “Pure Direct”. 121
No sound is output when 0 Digital signal audio input from the HDMI connector or digital audio connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) －
using ZONE2. cannot be played back. Use analog connections.
0 When listening to the audio of a Bluetooth device in ZONE2, remove any obstructions between the －
Bluetooth device and this unit and use it within a range of about 32.8 ft/10 m.

o Sound is interrupted or noise occurs

During playback from the 0 When the transfer speed of the USB memory device is slow, sound may occasionally be interrupted. －
Internet radio or USB 0 The network communication speed is slow or the radio station is busy. －
memory device, sound is
occasionally interrupted.
When making a call on 0 When making a call, keep a distance of 0.7 ft/20 cm or longer between iPhone and this unit. －
iPhone, noise occurs in
audio output on this unit.
Noise often occurs in 0 Change the antenna orientation or position. 57
FM/AM broadcasting. 0 Separate the AM loop antenna from the unit. －
0 Use an outdoor antenna. 57
0 Separate the antenna from other connection cables. 57
The sounds appear to be 0 Lower the volume. 65
distorted. 0 Set “Off” to the ECO Mode. When “On” or “Auto” is in the ECO Mode, the audio may by distorted when 204
the playback volume is high.
Sound cuts out when using 0 The frequency band used by the wireless LAN is also used by microwave ovens, cordless telephones, 59
Wi-Fi connection. wireless game controllers and other wireless LAN devices. Using such devices at the same time as this
unit may cause sound to cut out due to electronic interference. Sound cut out can be improved using the
following methods.
- Install devices that cause interference away from this unit.
- Turn off the power supply to devices that cause interference.
- Change the settings of the router channel to which this unit is connected to. (See the instruction manual
of the wireless router for details on how to change the channel.)
- Switch to a wired LAN connection.
0 Particularly when you play back large music files, depending on your wireless LAN environment, the 197
playback sound may be interrupted. In this case, make the wired LAN connection.

o No video is shown on the TV

No picture appears. 0 Check the connections for all devices. 48
0 Insert connection cables all the way in. －
0 Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected. －
0 Check cables for damage. －
0 Match the input settings to the input connector of the TV connected to this unit. 170
0 Check that the proper input source is selected. 64
0 Check the video input connector setting. 170
0 Check that the resolution of the player corresponds to that of the TV. 212
0 Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection (HDCP). If connected to a device not 236
compatible with HDCP, video will not be output correctly.
0 To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2, use a playback device and TV compatible with －
HDCP 2.2 only.
0 To play back a 4K (60/50Hz) video, use a “High Speed HDMI Cable” or an “High Speed HDMI Cable with －
Ethernet”. In order to achieve a higher fidelity for 4K (60/50Hz) videos, it is recommended to use a
“Premium High Speed HDMI Cables” or an “Premium High Speed HDMI Cables with Ethernet” that has
an HDMI Premium Certified Cable label on the product package.
No video is shown on the 0 With the DVI-D connection, on some device combinations, devices may not function properly due to the 236
TV with the DVI-D copy guard copyright protection (HDCP).
connection.
While the menu is being 0 The video being played will not appear in the background of the menu when the menu is operated during －
displayed, no video is playback of the following video signals.
shown on the TV. - Some images of 3D video content
- Computer resolution images (example: VGA)
- Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3
- Some images of 4K video content

o The menu screen is not displayed on the TV

The menu screen or status 0 The menu screen is only displayed on this unit and a TV connected with an HDMI cable. If this unit is －
information screen is not connected to a TV using a different video output connector, operate while watching the display on this
displayed on the TV. unit.
0 The status information will not appear on the TV when the following video signals are being played. 212
- Some images of 3D video content
- Computer resolution images (example: VGA)
- Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3
- Some images of 4K video content
0 When a 2D video is converted to a 3D video on the TV, the menu screen or status information screen is 212
not displayed properly.
0 In the pure direct playback mode, the menu screen or status information is not displayed. Switch to a 120
sound mode other than the pure direct mode.
0 Set the “TV Format” setting in the menu to a selection that is appropriate for the TV. 169

o iPod cannot be played back

iPod cannot be connected. 0 When using iPod by connecting it to the USB port, some iPod variations are not supported. 55
0 When iPod is connected by using a USB cable other than the genuine cable, iPod may not be －
recognized. Use a genuine USB cable.
The AirPlay icon ' is not 0 This unit and PC / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad are not connected to the same network (LAN). Connect it to 59
displayed on iTunes / the same LAN as this unit.
iPhone / iPod touch / iPad. 0 The firmware on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is not compatible with AirPlay. Update the firmware to －
the latest version.
Audio is not output. 0 The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is set to the minimum level. The volume on iTunes / －
iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is linked with the volume on this unit. Set a proper volume level.
0 The AirPlay playback is not performed, or this unit is not selected. Click the AirPlay icon ' on the 106
iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad screen and select this unit.
Audio is interrupted during 0 Quit the application running in the background of the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad, and then play using －
the AirPlay playback on AirPlay.
iPhone / iPod touch / iPad. 0 Some external factors may be affecting the wireless connection. Modify the network environment by －
taking measures such as shortening the distance from the wireless LAN access point.
iTunes cannot be played 0 Enable the “Allow iTunes audio control from remote speakers” setting on iTunes. Then, you can perform －
back through the remote playback, pause, and skip operations through the remote control unit.
control unit.

o USB memory devices cannot be played back

“No connection” is 0 This unit cannot recognize the USB memory device. Disconnect and reconnect the USB memory device. 55
displayed. 0 Mass storage class compatible USB memory devices are supported. －
0 This unit does not support a connection through a USB hub. Connect the USB memory device directly to －
the USB port.
0 The USB memory device must be formatted to FAT16 or FAT32. －
0 Not all USB memory devices are guaranteed to work. Some USB memory devices are not recognized. －
When using a type of portable hard disc drive compatible with the USB connection that requires power
from an AC adapter, use the AC adapter that came with the drive.
Files on the USB memory 0 Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. 71
device are not displayed. 0 This unit is able to display files in a maximum of eight folder layers. A maximum of 5000 files (folders) can －
also be displayed for each layer. Modify the folder structure of the USB memory device.
0 When multiple partitions exist on the USB memory device, only files on the first partition are displayed. －
Files on a USB memory 0 Files are created in a format that is not supported by this unit. Check the formats supported by this unit. 237
device cannot be played. 0 You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be －
played on this unit.
0 Playback may not be possible if the album art file size exceeds 2 MB. －

o File names on the iPod/USB memory device are not displayed properly
The file names are not 0 Characters that cannot be displayed have been used. On this unit, characters that cannot be displayed －
displayed properly (“...”, are replaced with a “. (period)”.
etc.).
o Bluetooth cannot be played back

Bluetooth devices cannot 0 The Bluetooth function in the Bluetooth device has not been enabled. See the Owner’s Manual of the －
be connected to this unit. Bluetooth device to enable the Bluetooth function.
0 Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit. －
0 The Bluetooth device cannot connect with this unit if it is not compatible with the A2DP profile. －
0 Turn the power of the Bluetooth device off and on again, and then try again. －
The sound is cut off. 0 Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit. －
0 Remove obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit. －
0 To prevent electromagnetic interference, locate this unit away from microwave ovens, wireless LAN －
devices and other Bluetooth devices.
0 Reconnect the Bluetooth device. －

o The Internet radio cannot be played back

A list of broadcasting 0 The LAN cable is not properly connected, or the network is disconnected. Check the connection status. 59
stations is not displayed. 0 Perform the network diagnostic mode. －
Internet Radio cannot be 0 The selected radio station is broadcasting in a format that is not supported by this unit. Formats that can 240
played. be played back in this unit are MP3, WMA and AAC.
0 The firewall function is enabled on the router. Check the firewall setting. －
0 The IP address is not properly set. 200
0 Check the power of the router is on. －
0 To obtain the IP address automatically, enable the DHCP server function on the router. Also, set the 200
DHCP setting to “On” on this unit.
0 To obtain the IP address manually, set the IP address and proxy on this unit. 200
0 Some radio stations broadcast silently during some time period. In this case, no audio is output. Wait for a 88
while and select the same radio station, or select another radio station.
Cannot connect to favorite 0 Radio station is not currently in service. Register radio stations in service. －
radio stations.
For some radio stations, 0 The selected radio station is not in service. Select a radio station in service. －
“Connection down” is
displayed and station
cannot be connected to.

o Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back

Files stored on a computer 0 Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible format. 239
cannot be played. 0 Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit. －
0 The set’s USB port cannot be used for connection to a computer. －
0 Media sharing settings are not correct. Change media sharing settings so that the unit can access the 92
folders on your computer.
Server is not found, or it is 0 The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the computer’s or router’s firewall settings. －
not possible to connect to 0 Computer’s power is not turned on. Turn on the power. －
the server.
0 Server is not running. Launch the server. －
0 Set’s IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address. 196
Music files on PC cannot 0 Even if PC is connected to the USB port on this unit, music files on it cannot be played back. Connect PC 59
be played back. to this unit through the network.
Files on PC or NAS are not 0 Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. 239
displayed.
Music stored on a NAS 0 If you use a NAS in conformity with the DLNA standard, enable the DLNA server function in the NAS －
cannot be played. setting.
0 If you use a NAS that does not conform with the DLNA standard, play the music via a PC. Set Windows 92
Media Player’s media sharing function and add NAS to the selected play folder.
0 If connection is restricted, set audio equipment as the connection target. －
o Various online services cannot be played

Various online services 0 The online service may have been discontinued. －
cannot be played.

o The HDMI control function does not work

The HDMI control function 0 Check that “HDMI Control” in the menu is set to “On”. 165
does not work. 0 You cannot operate devices that are not compatible with the HDMI control function. In addition, 131
depending on the connected device or the settings, the HDMI control function may not work. In this case,
operate the external device directly.
0 Check that the HDMI control function setting is enabled on all devices connected to this unit. 131
0 When you make connection related changes such as connecting an additional HDMI device, the link 131
operation settings may be initialized. Turn off this unit and devices connected via HDMI, and turn them on
again.

o Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network

Cannot connect to the 0 The network name (SSID), password and encryption setting have not been set up correctly. Configure the 199
network. network settings according to the setting details of this unit.
0 Shorten the distance from the wireless LAN access point and remove any obstructions to improve access －
first before re-connecting again. Place the unit away from microwave ovens and other network access
points.
0 Configure the access point channel settings away from channels that are being used by other networks. －
0 This unit is not compatible with WEP (TSN). －
0 The wireless router may be set to a channel that cannot be used by this unit. Switch the wireless router －
channel setting to a channel that can be used by this unit. See the instruction manual of the wireless
router for details on how to change the channel.
Compatible channels for this unit are as shown below.
2.4 GHz：1 - 11ch
5 GHz：36 - 48ch, 149 - 165ch
Cannot connect to WPS. 0 Check that the WPS mode of the router is operating. －
0 Press the WPS button on the router and then press the “Connect” button displayed on the TV within 2 －
minutes.
0 A router/settings that are compatible with WPS 2.0 standards are required. Set the encryption time to 199
“None”, “WPA-PSK (AES)” or WPA2-PSK (AES).
0 If the router encryption method is WEP/WPA-TKIP/WPA2-TKIP, you cannot connect by using the WPS －
button. In this case, use the “Scan Networks” or “Manual” method to connect.
Cannot connect to the 0 Update the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad firmware to the latest version. －
network using iPhone/iPod 0 When using a USB cable to configure the settings, the iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS －
touch/iPad. 5 or later. When configuring the settings via a wireless connection, iOS 7 or later needs to be supported.

Resetting factory settings

Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed.
Various settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again.
X TUNER PRESET CH – 1 Turn off the power using X.
2 Press X while simultaneously pressing TUNER

PRESET CH + and TUNER PRESET CH -.
3 Remove your fingers from the two buttons when

“Initialized” appears on the display.
0 Before restoring the default setting, the “Save” function of the web control function
TUNER PRESET CH + can be used to store the various settings of the unit. (v p. 140)
.
However, account information for network content and information on registered
favorites cannot be stored.
0 When deleting a Pandora account, carry out steps 1 to 3 after signing out in the
Pandora service. (v p. 101)

About HDMI
HDMI is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia Interface, which is 0 3D
an AV digital interface that can be connected to a TV or amplifier. This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals
With the HDMI connection, high definition video and high quality audio of HDMI. To play back 3D video, you need a TV and player that
formats adopted by Blu-ray Disc players (Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby provide support for the HDMI 3D function and a pair of 3D glasses.
TrueHD, DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio) can be transmitted, which is not
possible with the analog video transmission. 0 4K
Furthermore, in the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be This unit supports input and output of 4K (3840 x 2160 pixels) video
transmitted through a single HDMI cable, while in conventional signals of HDMI.
connections it is necessary to provide audio and video cables separately 0 Content Type
for connection between devices. This allows you to simplify the wiring
It automatically makes settings suitable for the video output type
configuration that tends to be quite complex in a home theater system.
(content information).
This unit supports the following HDMI functions.
0 Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color
0 Deep Color The color space defined by Adobe Systems Inc. Because it is a wider
An imaging technology supported by HDMI. Unlike RGB or YCbCr, color space than RGB, it can produce more vivid and natural images.
which uses 8 bits (256 shades) per color, it can use 10 bits (1024
shades), 12 bits (4096 shades), or 16 bits (65536 shades) to produce 0 sYCC601 color
colors in higher definition. Each of these color spaces defines a palette of available colors that is
Both devices linked via HDMI must support Deep Color. larger than the traditional RGB color model.
0 “x.v.Color”
This function lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. It enables
display with natural, vivid colors.
“x.v.Color” is trademark of Sony Corporation.

0 Auto Lip Sync 0 ARC (Audio Return Channel)

This function can automatically correct delay between the audio and This function transmits audio signals from the TV to this unit through
video. the HDMI cable and plays back the audio from the TV on this unit
Use a TV that is compatible with the Auto Lip Sync function. based on the HDMI control function.
0 HDMI Pass Through If a TV without the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections,
video signals of the playback device connected to this unit are
Even when the power to this unit is set to standby, signals input from
transmitted to the TV, but this unit can not play back the audio from the
the HDMI input connector are output to a TV or other device that is
TV. If you want to enjoy surround audio for TV program, a separate
connected to the HDMI output connector.
audio cable connection is required.
0 HDMI Control In contrast, if a TV with the ARC function is connected via HDMI
If you connect the unit and an HDMI control function compatible TV or connections, no audio cable connection is required. Audio signals from
player with an HDMI cable and then enable the HDMI control function the TV can be input to this unit through the HDMI cable between this
setting on each device, the devices will be able to control each other. unit and the TV. This function allows you to enjoy surround playback
0 Power off link on this unit for the TV.
This unit power off can be linked to the TV power off step.
0 Audio output destination switching
From the TV, you can switch whether to output audio from the TV or
the AV amplifier.
0 Volume adjustment
You can adjust this unit’s volume in the TV volume adjustment
operation.
0 Input source switching
You can switch this unit input sources through linkage to TV input
switching.
When playing the player, this unit input source switches to the
source for that player.

o Supported audio formats Copyright protection system
2-channel Linear 2-channel, 32 kHz – 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD video or DVD
PCM video via HDMI connection, both this unit and the TV or player must to
support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (High-
Multi-channel 7.1-channel, 32 kHz – 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit bandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright
Linear PCM protection technology comprised of data encryption and authentication of
Dolby Digital / DTS / Dolby Atmos / Dolby TrueHD / the connected AV devices. This unit supports HDCP.
Bitstream Dolby Digital Plus / DTS:X / DTS-HD Master Audio / 0 If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio / DTS Express are not output correctly. Read the owner’s manual of your television or
player for more information.
o Supported video signals
0 480i 0 480p 0 When connecting this unit to a device that is compatible with the Deep Color, 4K
and ARC functions, use a “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet” that bears the
0 576i 0 576p
HDMI logo.
0 720p 60/50Hz 0 1080i 60/50Hz
0 1080p 60/50/24Hz 0 4K 60/50/30/25/24 Hz

Playing back a USB memory devices

0 This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
0 This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
0 This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
0 If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played back
properly.
o Compatible formats
z1 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.
Sampling frequency Bit rate Extension
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected.
32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192 .wma
WMAz1 kbps
Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer
may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.
MP3 32/44.1/48 kHz 32 – 320 .mp3
kbps z2 Copyright [2012] [D&M Holdings. Inc.]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not
WAV 32/44.1/48/88.2/ – .wav
96/176.4/192 kHz use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of
the License at
16 – 320 .aac/ http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
MPEG-4 AACz1 32/44.1/48 kHz kbps .m4a/
.mp4
FLAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/ – .flac
96/176.4/192 kHz
0 In ZONE2, it is not possible to play the DSD signal.
32/44.1/48/88.2/ – .m4a
ALACz2 96 kHz
DSD 2.8/5.6 MHz – .dsf/
.dff
AIFF 32/44.1/48/88.2/ – .aif/
96/176.4/192 kHz .aiff

o Maximum number of playable files and folder Playing back a Bluetooth device
The limits on the number of folders and files that can be displayed by
this unit are as follows. This unit supports the following Bluetooth profile.
0 A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile):
Media
USB memory device When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected,
Item
monaural and stereo sound data can be streamed at a high quality.
Memory capacity FAT16 : 2 GB, FAT32 : 2 TB 0 AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile):
Number of folder directory levels z1 8 levels When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, the
Bluetooth device can be operated from this unit.
Number of folders 500
Number of filesz2 5000
o About Bluetooth communications
z1 The limited number includes the root folder.
z2 The allowable number of files may differ according to the USB memory device
Radio waves broadcast from this unit may interfere with the operation
capacity and the file size. of medical devices. Make sure you turn off the power of this unit and
Bluetooth device in the following locations as radio wave interference
may cause malfunctions.
0 Hospitals, trains, aircraft, petrol kiosks and places where flammable
gases are generated
0 Near automatic doors and fire alarms

Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS

0 This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
0 This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
0 This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
0 If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played
back properly.
0 A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.
o Specifications of supported files

z1 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.
Sampling frequency Bit rate Extension
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected.
48 – 192
WMAz1 32/44.1/48 kHz .wma Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer
kbps
may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.
32 – 320
MP3 32/44.1/48 kHz .mp3 z2 Copyright [2012] [D&M Holdings. Inc.]
kbps
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not
32/44.1/48/88.2/ use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of
WAV – .wav
96/176.4/192 kHz the License at
.aac/ http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
16 – 320
MPEG-4 AACz1 32/44.1/48 kHz .m4a/
kbps .mp4
32/44.1/48/88.2/
FLAC – .flac
96/176.4/192 kHz 0 In ZONE2, it is not possible to play the DSD signal.
32/44.1/48/88.2/
ALACz2 – .m4a
96 kHz
.dsf/
DSD 2.8/5.6 MHz – .dff
32/44.1/48/88.2/ .aif/
AIFF –
96/176.4/192 kHz .aiff

Playing back Internet Radio Personal memory plus function

The most recently used settings (input mode, HDMI output mode, sound
o Playable broadcast station specifications mode, tone control, channel level, MultEQ® XT, Dynamic EQ, Dynamic
Sampling frequency Bit rate Extension Volume, Restorer and audio delay, etc.) are saved for each input source.
48 – 192
WMA 32/44.1/48 kHz kbps .wma
32 – 320 0 “Surr.Parameter” settings are stored for each sound mode.
MP3 32/44.1/48 kHz .mp3
kbps
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320

kbps
.aac/
.m4a/ Last function memory
.mp4
This function stores the settings which were made before going into the
standby mode.

Sound modes and channel output

S This indicates the audio output channels or surround parameters that can be set.
D This indicates the audio output channels. The output channels depend on the settings of “Speaker Config.”. (v p. 186)
.
Channel output
Sound mode Front Dolby Surround Dolby
Surround Back Front Height Top Front Top Middle
Front L/R Center Surround L/R Atmos Enabled Atmos Enabled Subwoofer
L/R L/R L/R L/R
L/R L/R
Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel) S Dz5
Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel) S D D Dz3 Dz3 Dz3 Dz3 Dz3 Dz3 D
Stereo S D
Multi Ch In S D D D D
Dolby Surround z1 S D D Dz4 D D D D D D
DTS Neural:X z2 S D D D D D D D D D
Dolby Digital S D D D
Dolby Digital Plus S D D Dz3 Dz3 D
Dolby TrueHD S D D Dz3 Dz3 D
Dolby Atmos S D D D D D D D D D
DTS Surround S D D D D
DTS 96/24 S D D D D
DTS-HD S D D Dz3 Dz3 D
DTS Express S D D D D
DTS:X S D D D D D D D D D
Multi Ch Stereo S D D D D D D D D D
Rock Arena S D D D D D D D D D
Jazz Club S D D D D D D D D D
Mono Movie S D D D D D D D D D
Video Game S D D D D D D D D D
Matrix S D D D D D D D D D
Virtual S D
z1 The applicable sound mode includes “Dolby Surround” and sound modes that have “+Dolby Surround” in the sound mode name.
z2 The applicable sound mode includes “DTS Neural:X” and sound modes that have “+Neural:X” in the sound mode name.
z3 A signal for each channel contained in an input signal is output as audio.
z4 Audio is not output when “Speaker Config.” - “Surround Back” in the menu is set to “1 spkr”. (v p. 188)
z5 Audio is output when “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 194)

Sound modes and surround parameters
.
Surr.Parameter
Sound mode Loudness Dynamic
Subwoofer Dialog Control Low Frequency
Dialog Level Cinema EQ Mngmt Comp. Delay Time
Level z3 z4
z1 z2
Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel) z5 Sz6 S S
Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel) z5 S S S S S S
Stereo S S S S S
Multi Ch In S S S S
Dolby Surround S S S S S S
DTS Neural:X S S S S S
Dolby Digital S S S S S S
Dolby Digital Plus S S S S S S
Dolby TrueHD S S S S S S
Dolby Atmos S S S S S S
DTS Surround S S S S S
DTS 96/24 S S S S
DTS-HD S S S S
DTS Express S S S S
DTS:X S S S S S S
Multi Ch Stereo S S S S S S S
Rock Arena S S S S S S S
Jazz Club S S S S S S S
Mono Movie S S S S S S S
Video Game S S S S S S S
Matrix S S S S S S S
Virtual S S S S S
z1 - z6 : “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 244)

.
Surr.Parameter Audyssey
Tone Restorer
Sound mode MultEQ® XT Dynamic EQ Dynamic Volume
Room Size Center Spread DTS Neural:X z7 z11
z8z9 z10 z10
Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel) z5
Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel) z5
Stereo S S S S S
Multi Ch In S S S S
Dolby Surround S S S S S S
DTS Neural:X S S S S S
Dolby Digital S S S S
Dolby Digital Plus S S S S
Dolby TrueHD S S S S
Dolby Atmos S S S S
DTS Surround S S S S
DTS 96/24 S S S S
DTS-HD S S S S
DTS Express S S S S
DTS:X S S S S S
Multi Ch Stereo S S S S S
Rock Arena S S S S S S
Jazz Club S S S S S S
Mono Movie S S S S S S
Video Game S S S S S S
Matrix S S S S S
Virtual S S S S S
z5, z7 - z11: “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 244)

z1 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos signal is played.
z2 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or DTS signal is played.
z3 This item can be selected when a DTS:X signal that is compatible with the Dialog Control function is input.
z4 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal or DVD-Audio is played.
z5 During playback in Pure Direct mode, the surround parameters are the same as in Direct mode.
z6 This setting is available when “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 194)
z7 This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On”. (v p. 159)
z8 This item cannot be set when Audyssey® Setup (Speaker Calibration) has not been performed.
z9 This item cannot be selected when a DTS:X format with a sampling frequency of over 48 kHz is input.
z10 This item cannot be set when “MultEQ® XT” is set to “Off”. (v p. 159)
z11 This item can be set when the input signal is analog, PCM 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz.

Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes

F This indicates the default sound mode.
S This indicates the selectable sound mode.
.
2-channel signal Multi-channel signal
Sound mode NOTE Dolby Dolby Dolby
Analog / DTS PCM DTS DTS ES DTS ES Dolby Dolby
Digital DTS:X DTS-HD DTS Digital Digital
PCM (-HD) Multi Express Dscrt6.1 Mtrx6.1 Atmos TrueHD
(+/HD) Plus (EX)
DTS Surround
DTS:X MSTR / DTS:X F
DTS-HD MSTR Fz3
DTS-HD HI RES Fz4
DTS ES Dscrt6.1 z2 F
DTS ES Mtrx6.1 z2 F
DTS Surround S S F
DTS 96/24 Fz5
DTS Express F
DTS (-HD) + Neural:X S S S
DTS Neural:X S F
Dolby Surround
Dolby Atmos z1 F
Dolby TrueHD Sz6 S
Dolby Digital+ Sz7 S
Dolby (D+) (HD) + Dolby Surround F F F
Dolby Digital S
Dolby Surround S F
z1 – z7 : “Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes” (v p. 247)

.
2-channel signal Multi-channel signal
Sound mode NOTE Dolby Dolby Dolby
Analog / DTS PCM DTS DTS ES DTS ES Dolby Dolby
Digital DTS:X DTS-HD DTS Digital Digital
PCM (-HD) Multi Express Dscrt6.1 Mtrx6.1 Atmos TrueHD
(+/HD) Plus (EX)
Multi Ch In
Multi Ch In F
Multi Ch In + Dolby Surround S
Multi Ch In 7.1 z2 Sz9
Multi Ch In + Neural:X S
Direct
Direct Sz8 S S S S S S S S S S S S S
Pure Direct
Pure Direct S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
Original sound mode
Multi Ch Stereo S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
Rock Arena S S S S S S S S S Sz10 S S S
Jazz Club S S S S S S S S S Sz10 S S S
Mono Movie S S S S S S S S S Sz10 S S S
Video Game S S S S S S S S S Sz10 S S S
Matrix S S S S S S S S S Sz10 S S S
Virtual S S S S S S S S S Sz10 S S S
Stereo
Stereo F S S S S S S S S S S S S S
z2, z8 – z10 : “Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes” (v p. 247)

z1 This item can be selected when using any of the Surround Back, Front Height, Top Front, Top Middle, Front Dolby or Surround Dolby speaker.
z2 This item can be selected when surround back speakers are used.
z3 This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS-HD Master Audio.
z4 This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS-HD Hi Resolution.
z5 This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS 96/24.
z6 This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby TrueHD signal.
z7 This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby Digital Plus signal.
z8 The default sound mode for the AirPlay playback is “Direct”.
z9 This item can be selected when the input signals contain surround back signals.
z10 This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus signal.

Explanation of terms
o Audyssey Audyssey MultEQ® XT
Audyssey MultEQ® XT is a room equalization solution that calibrates any
Audyssey Dynamic EQ®
audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every
Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume listener in a large listening area. Based on several room measurements,
is decreased by taking into account human perception and room
MultEQ® XT calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both time
acoustics.
and frequency response problems in the listening area and also performs
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ® XT to a fully automated surround system setup.
provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® o Dolby

Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level
Dolby Atmos
between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of
passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is integrated into Dynamic
dimension and immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos
Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the
is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio
perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog
as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and
clarity remain the same.
move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during
playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height
plane of sound above the listener.

Dolby Atmos Stream Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is
receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also
downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is
special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers greater
This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the
scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of playback device.
every size and configuration.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Digital Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently
Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for playback through your surround
Laboratories. speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker
A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels (“FL”, “FR” and “C”), 2 layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-
surround channels (“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for low ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology.
frequency effects.
Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic
sound field with a “three-dimensional” feeling (sense of distance,
movement and positioning) is achieved. This delivers a thrilling surround
sound experience in the home.

Dolby Speaker Technology (Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers) o DTS

A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, Dolby Atmos Dialog Control
Enabled speakers employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for
reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. These speakers Gives you control of the listening experience. You can lift the dialog out
feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing. These from the background sounds when clarity and intelligibility are desired.
features can be built into a conventional speaker or standalone speaker This requires that content has been authored to support Dialog Control.
module. The features minimally impact the overall speaker footprint while DTS
providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and
This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System, which is a digital audio
Dolby surround playback.
system developed by DTS. DTS delivers a powerful and dynamic
Dolby TrueHD surround sound experience, and is found in the world’s finest movie
Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby theaters and screening rooms.
Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the DTS 96/24
sound of the studio master.
DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in
This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a 5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization
sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels on DVD-Video.
with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS™ Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS,
Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to
5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.

DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional
adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound. DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling
Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital
according to the decoder. sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound. This
format is fully compatible with conventional products, including
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1
conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel audio format that inserts a surround
back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix DTS-HD Master Audio
encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format created by Digital
possible according to the decoder. Theater System (DTS). This format provides the facility to support up to 8
audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and
DTS Express
up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit
DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit rates (max. 5.1- resolution. It is fully compatible with conventional products, including
channels, 24 to 256 kbps). conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS-HD DTS:X
This audio technology provides higher sound quality and enhanced DTS:X produces a hemisphere of audio, where flyovers as well as ambient
functionality than the conventional DTS and is adopted as an optional backgrounds become truly enveloping. DTS:X objects enable audio to
audio for Blu-ray Disc. move smoothly from one speaker to any other creating life-like realism.
This technology supports multi-channel, high data transfer speed, high
DTS Neural:X
sampling frequency, and lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels
are supported in Blu-ray Disc. Enables an immersive audio experience for older content. DTS Neural:X
can upmix your stereo, 5.1 or 7.1 content to take full advantage of all
speakers in your surround sound system.

o Audio THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec) WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
This is a codec for lossless audio compression method developed by
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
Apple Inc. This codec can be played back on iTunes, iPod or iPhone. Data
FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
compressed to approximately 60 – 70 % can be decompressed to exactly
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
the same original data.
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
FLAC stands for Free lossless Audio Codec, and is a lossless free audio USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
file format. Lossless means that the audio is compressed without any loss CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
in quality. CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
The FLAC license is as shown below.
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008,
DAMAGE.
2009 Josh Coalson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without LFE
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect, which is an output
0 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, channel that emphasizes low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep bass to the system
0 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright subwoofer(s).
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
This is an internationally standardized audio data compression scheme,
0 Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its
using the “MPEG-1” video compression standard. It compresses the data
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
volume to about one eleventh its original size while maintaining sound
this software without specific prior written permission.
quality equivalent to a music CD.

MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group), MPEG-2, MPEG-4 Speaker impedance

These are the names for digital compression format standards used for This is an AC resistance value, indicated in Ω (ohms).
the encoding of video and audio. Video standards include “MPEG-1 Greater power can be obtained when this value is smaller.
Video”, “MPEG-2 Video”, “MPEG-4 Visual”, “MPEG-4 AVC”. Audio
standards include “MPEG-1 Audio”, “MPEG-2 Audio”, “MPEG-4 AAC”. Dialogue normalization function
This function operates automatically during playback of Dolby Digital,
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS or DTS-HD sources.
This is audio compression technology developed by Microsoft It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program
Corporation. sources.
WMA data can be encoded using Windows Media® Player.
Dynamic range
To encode WMA files, only use applications authorized by Microsoft
The difference between the maximum undistorted sound level and the
Corporation. If you use an unauthorized application, the file may not work
minimum discernible level above the noise emitted by the device.
properly.
Downmix
Sampling frequency
This function converts the number of channels of surround audio to a
Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave (analog signal) at
lower number of channels and plays back according to the system’s
regular intervals and expressing the height of the wave at each reading in
configuration.
digitized format (producing a digital signal).
The number of readings taken in one second is called the “sampling
frequency”. The larger the value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the
original.

o Video o Network
Progressive (sequential scanning) AirPlay
This is a scanning system of the video signal that displays 1 frame of video AirPlay sends (plays) contents recorded in iTunes or on an iPhone/iPod
as one image. Compared to the interlace system, this system provides touch/iPad to a compatible device via the network.
images with less flickering and jagged edges.
DLNA
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of
Digital Living Network Alliance. Some contents may not be compatible
with other DLNA CERTIFIED® products.
vTuner
This is a free online content server for Internet Radio.
For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below.
vTuner website:
http://www.radiodenon.com
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing
Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such
technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from
Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.

WEP Key (network key) WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared Key)

This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when a
transfer. On this unit, the same WEP key is used for data encryption and preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point and
decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on both devices in order for client.
communications to be established between them.
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
Wi-Fi® This is a standard drawn up by the Wi-Fi Alliance to ease the task of
Wi-Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the Wi-Fi setting up wireless LAN connections and configuring security.
Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices.
Network Names (SSID: Service Set Identifier)
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent
This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition to interference, data theft, etc. These groups are based on “SSID (network
the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key), it also names)”. For enhanced security, a WEP key is set so that communication
uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for stronger is unavailable unless both the “SSID” and the WEP key match. This is
security. suitable for constructing a simplified network.
WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2)

This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
compatible with more secure AES encryption.

o Others Pairing
HDCP Pairing (registration) is an operation that is required in order to connect a

Bluetooth device to this unit using Bluetooth. When paired, the devices
When transmitting digital signals between devices, this copyright authenticate each other and can connect without mistaken connections
protection technology encrypts the signals to prevent content from being occurring.
copied without authorization. When using Bluetooth connection for the first time, you need to pair this
MAIN ZONE unit and the Bluetooth device to be connected.
The room where this unit is placed is called the MAIN ZONE. Protection circuit
This is a function to prevent damage to devices within the power supply
when an abnormality such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or over
temperature for any reason.

Trademark information
.
Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories™. U.S. and
.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ® XT, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®
has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, and Audyssey Dynamic Volume® are registered trademarks of Audyssey
respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple Laboratories.
performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this
accessory with iPod, or iPhone, may affect wireless performance.
.
AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle and The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by D&M Holdings Inc.
countries. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their
0 Individual users are permitted to use iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod respective owners.
nano, iPod shuffle, and iPod touch for private copy and playback of
non-copyrighted contents and contents whose copy and playback is
permitted by law. Copyright infringement is prohibited by law.
.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby
Atmos, Dolby Surround, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.

.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license .
from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol,
DTS:X, and the DTSX logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi
DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Alliance.
Rights Reserved. Wi-Fi Certification provides assurance that the device has passed the
interoperability test conducted by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group that certifies
interoperability among wireless LAN devices.
.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the
HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing
LLC in the United States and other countries.

Specifications
o Audio section
0 Power amplifier
Rated output: Front:

80 W + 80 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.08 % T.H.D.)
120 W + 120 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Center:
80 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.08 % T.H.D.)
120 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Surround:
Surround back:
Output connectors: 4 – 16 Ω/ohms
0 Analog
Input sensitivity/Input impedance: 200 mV/47 kΩ/kohms

Frequency response: 10 Hz – 100 kHz — +1, –3 dB (Direct mode)
S/N: 98 dB (IHF–A weighted, Direct mode)

o Video section
0 Standard video connectors
Input/output level and impedance: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

Frequency response: 5 Hz – 10 MHz — 0, –3 dB
o Tuner section [FM] [AM]
(Note: μV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10 –15 W)

Reception frequency range: 87.5 MHz – 107.9 MHz 520 kHz – 1710 kHz
Effective sensitivity: 1.2 μV (12.8 dBf) 18 μV
50 dB sensitivity: MONO ― 2.8 μV (20.2 dBf)
S/N ratio: MONO ― 70 dB (IHF–A weighted, Direct mode)
STEREO ― 67 dB (IHF–A weighted, Direct mode)
Distortion: MONO ― 0.7 % (1 kHz)
STEREO ― 1.0 % (1 kHz)

o Wireless LAN section

Network type (wireless LAN standard): Conforming to IEEE 802.11a
Conforming to IEEE 802.11b
Conforming to IEEE 802.11g
Conforming to IEEE 802.11n
(Wi-Fi® compliant)z1
Security: WEP 64 bit, WEP 128 bit
WPA/WPA2-PSK (AES)
WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP)
Radio frequency: 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz
No. of channels: 2.4 GHz: 1 – 11 ch
5 GHz: 36 – 48 ch, 149 – 165 ch
z1 The Wi-Fi® CERTIFIED Logo and the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED On-Product Logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

o Bluetooth section
Communications system: Bluetooth Version 2.1 + EDR (Enhanced Data Rate)
Transmission power: Maximum 2.5 mW (Class 2)
Maximum communication range: Approx. 32.8 ft/10 m in line of sightz2
Frequency band: 2.4 GHz band
Modulation scheme: FHSS (Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum)
Supported profiles: A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) 1.2
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) 1.4
Corresponding codec: SBC, AAC
Transmission range (A2DP): 20 Hz – 20,000 Hz
z2 The actual communication range varies depending on the influence of such factors as obstructions between devices, electromagnetic waves from
microwave ovens, static electricity, cordless phones, reception sensitivity, antenna performance, operating system, application software etc.
o General
Power supply: AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Power consumption: 430 W
Power consumption in standby mode: 0.1 W
Power consumption in CEC standby
mode: 0.5 W
Power consumption in network standby
mode: 2.7 W
For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.

o Dimensions (Unit : in. (mm))
1 3/8
(32)
1 7/8
(47)
7 7/8 (197)
11 3/8 (288)
13 3/8 (339)
1 3/4
(44)
(19)
3/4
17 1/8 (434)
5 3/8 (136)
8 1/2 (215)
6 (151)
(15)
2 3/8
(60) 5/8
1 7/8 (45) 13 5/8 (344) 1 7/8 (45)
.
o Weight : 18 lbs 12 oz (8.5 kg)

Index vB vE
Bi-amp ............................................................ 44 ECO Mode ................................................... 204
Bluetooth device ............................................ 75 External control device ................................... 61
v Numerics
Blu-ray Disc player ................................... 53, 65
3D ................................................................ 234 vF
4K ................................................................ 234 vC Favorites .............................................. 111, 112
5.1-channel .............................................. 29, 37
Cable TV ........................................................ 52 Firmware Update .......................................... 209
7.1-channel .............................................. 29, 38
FM/AM antenna ........................................ 57, 80
vD Front panel ..................................................... 13
vA
Direct sound mode ....................................... 126
AirPlay .......................................................... 105 vG
Display ........................................................... 16
All Zone Stereo ............................................ 118
DLNA ........................................................... 254 Game console ................................................ 54
Audio formats ....................... 236, 237, 239, 240
Dolby Atmos ................................................. 248 General settings ................................... 147, 204
Audio settings ....................................... 145, 151
Dolby sound mode ............................... 123, 249
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® ............................. 248 vH
DTS sound mode ................................. 124, 250
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® ...................... 248 HDCP ........................................................... 236
DVD player ............................................... 53, 65
Audyssey MultEQ® XT ................................ 248 HDMI Control ....................................... 131, 165
Audyssey settings ................................ 158, 176
Audyssey® Setup ........................................ 174
Auto sound mode ......................................... 125
Auto Standby ............................................... 206

vI vN vR
Input Assign ................................................. 170 NAS ............................................................... 91 Random playback .................................. 70, 110
Input settings ........................................ 146, 170 Network settings ................................... 146, 196 Rear panel ...................................................... 18
Input signal ................................................... 245 Remote control unit ........................................ 21
Input source ................................................... 64 vO Repeat playback .................................... 70, 110
Inputting characters ...................................... 149 Original sound mode .................................... 125 Resetting factory settings ............................. 233
Internet Radio ................................................. 87 Restorer ....................................................... 156
iPod .......................................................... 55, 66 vP
iPod Browse Mode ......................................... 68 Pairing ...................................................... 75, 77 vS

Pandora® ...................................................... 95 Satellite tuner ................................................. 52
vJ PC .................................................................. 91 Set-top box ..................................................... 52
JPEG ........................................................ 71, 91 PCM multi-channel sound mode .................. 124 Setup Assistant ............................................ 147
Protection circuit .......................................... 256 SiriusXM ....................................................... 102
vL Pure direct .................................................... 121 Sleep timer ................................................... 134
Listening position ......................................... 174 Slideshow .................................................... 113
vQ Sound mode ................................. 120, 241, 242
vM Quick select plus .......................................... 136 Speaker connection ....................................... 25
Menu map .................................................... 145 Speaker settings .................................. 146, 174
Muting ............................................................ 65 Spotify .......................................................... 108
Stereo sound mode ...................................... 126

vT vW
Text Search .................................................. 112 Web control .................................................. 139
Tips .............................................................. 215 Wi-Fi settings ............................................... 197
Troubleshooting ........................................... 217 Wired LAN .............................................. 59, 196
TV ....................................................... 48, 49, 50 Wireless LAN ......................................... 60, 197
vU vZ
USB memory device ................................ 55, 71 ZONE2 ................................................... 46, 141
vV
Video camcorder ............................................ 54
Video Select ................................................. 117
Video settings ....................................... 145, 163
Volume ................................................... 65, 115

License
This section describes software license used for this unit.
To maintain the correct content, the original (English) is used.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
o Boost software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software
http://www.boost.org/ without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
Boost Software License – Version 1.0 – August 17th, 2003 publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization obtaining conditions:
a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies
(the “Software”) to use, reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and transmit the
or substantial portions of the Software.
Software, and to prepare derivative works of the Software, and to permit third-parties
to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all subject to the following: THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including the above
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, must be included in all
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all derivative works of the Software,
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine-executable
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
object code generated by a source language processor.
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR o FastDelegate
ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR http://www.codeproject.com/KB/cpp/FastDelegate.aspx
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
THE WORK (AS DEFINED BELOW) IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
CODE PROJECT OPEN LICENSE (“LICENSE”). THE WORK IS PROTECTED BY
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
COPYRIGHT AND/OR OTHER APPLICABLE LAW. ANY USE OF THE WORK
OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED UNDER THIS LICENSE OR COPYRIGHT LAW IS
o Expat PROHIBITED.
http://www.jclark.com/xml/expat.html BY EXERCISING ANY RIGHTS TO THE WORK PROVIDED HEREIN, YOU
ACCEPT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. THE
Expat License. Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center
AUTHOR GRANTS YOU THE RIGHTS CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONSIDERATION
Ltd
OF YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF SUCH TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT
AGREE TO ACCEPT AND BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, YOU
CANNOT MAKE ANY USE OF THE WORK.

Definitions. “Articles” means, collectively, all articles written by Author which You may otherwise modify Your copy of this Work (excluding the Articles) in any way
describes how the Source Code and Executable Files for the Work may be used by a to create a Derivative Work, provided that You insert a prominent notice in each
user. changed file stating how, when and where You changed that file.
“Author” means the individual or entity that offers the Work under the terms of this You may distribute the standard version of the Executable Files and Source Code or
License. Derivative Work in aggregate with other (possibly commercial) programs as part of a
“Derivative Work” means a work based upon the Work or upon the Work and other larger (possibly commercial) software distribution.
pre-existing works. The Articles discussing the Work published in any form by the author may not be
“Executable Files” refer to the executables, binary files, configuration and any distributed or republished without the Author’s consent. The author retains copyright
required data files included in the Work. to any such Articles. You may use the Executable Files and Source Code pursuant to
“Publisher” means the provider of the website, magazine, CD-ROM, DVD or other this License but you may not repost or republish or otherwise distribute or make
medium from or by which the Work is obtained by You. available the Articles, without the prior written consent of the Author.
“Source Code” refers to the collection of source code and configuration files used to Any subroutines or modules supplied by You and linked into the Source Code or
create the Executable Files. Executable Files this Work shall not be considered part of this Work and will not be
“Standard Version” refers to such a Work if it has not been modified, or has been subject to the terms of this License.
modified in accordance with the consent of the Author, such consent being in the full Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Author
discretion of the Author. hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free,
“Work” refers to the collection of files distributed by the Publisher, including the irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use,
Source Code, Executable Files, binaries, data files, documentation, whitepapers and import, and otherwise transfer the Work.
the Articles.
Restrictions. The license granted in Section 3 above is expressly made subject to
“You” is you, an individual or entity wishing to use the Work and exercise your rights
and limited by the following restrictions: You agree not to remove any of the original
under this License.
copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices and associated disclaimers that
Fair Use/Fair Use Rights. Nothing in this License is intended to reduce, limit, or may appear in the Source Code or Executable Files.
restrict any rights arising from fair use, fair dealing, first sale or other limitations on the You agree not to advertise or in any way imply that this Work is a product of Your
exclusive rights of the copyright owner under copyright law or other applicable laws. own.
License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, the Author hereby The name of the Author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive, perpetual (for the duration of the from the Work without the prior written consent of the Author.
applicable copyright) license to exercise the rights in the Work as stated below: You
You agree not to sell, lease, or rent any part of the Work. This does not restrict you
may use the standard version of the Source Code or Executable Files in Your own
from including the Work or any part of the Work inside a larger software distribution
applications.
that itself is being sold. The Work by itself, though, cannot be sold, leased or rented.
You may apply bug fixes, portability fixes and other modifications obtained from the
Public Domain or from the Author. A Work modified in such a way shall still be
considered the standard version and will be subject to this License.

You may distribute the Executable Files and Source Code only under the terms of This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically upon any
this License, and You must include a copy of, or the Uniform Resource Identifier for, breach by You of any term of this License. Individuals or entities who have received
this License with every copy of the Executable Files or Source Code You distribute Derivative Works from You under this License, however, will not have their licenses
and ensure that anyone receiving such Executable Files and Source Code agrees terminated provided such individuals or entities remain in full compliance with those
that the terms of this License apply to such Executable Files and/or Source Code. licenses. Sections 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11 will survive any termination of this
You may not offer or impose any terms on the Work that alter or restrict the terms of License.
this License or the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted hereunder. You may not If You bring a copyright, trademark, patent or any other infringement claim against
sublicense the Work. You must keep intact all notices that refer to this License and to any contributor over infringements You claim are made by the Work, your License
the disclaimer of warranties. You may not distribute the Executable Files or Source from such contributor to the Work ends automatically.
Code with any technological measures that control access or use of the Work in a Subject to the above terms and conditions, this License is perpetual (for the duration
manner inconsistent with the terms of this License. of the applicable copyright in the Work). Notwithstanding the above, the Author
You agree not to use the Work for illegal, immoral or improper purposes, or on pages reserves the right to release the Work under different license terms or to stop
containing illegal, immoral or improper material. The Work is subject to applicable distributing the Work at any time; provided, however that any such election will not
export laws. You agree to comply with all such laws and regulations that may apply to serve to withdraw this License (or any other license that has been, or is required to
the Work after Your receipt of the Work. be, granted under the terms of this License), and this License will continue in full
Representations, Warranties and Disclaimer. THIS WORK IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, force and effect unless terminated as stated above.
“WHERE IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED Publisher. The parties hereby confirm that the Publisher shall not, under any
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR GUARANTEES. YOU, THE USER, ASSUME circumstances, be responsible for and shall not have any liability in respect of the
ALL RISK IN ITS USE, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, PATENT subject matter of this License. The Publisher makes no warranty whatsoever in
INFRINGEMENT, SUITABILITY, ETC. AUTHOR EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL connection with the Work and shall not be liable to You or any party on any legal
EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, theory for any damages whatsoever, including without limitation any general, special,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF incidental or consequential damages arising in connection to this license. The
MERCHANTABILITY, MERCHANTABLE QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR A Publisher reserves the right to cease making the Work available to You at any time
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ANY WARRANTY OF TITLE OR NON- without notice
INFRINGEMENT, OR THAT THE WORK (OR ANY PORTION THEREOF) IS Miscellaneous
CORRECT, USEFUL, BUG-FREE OR FREE OF VIRUSES. YOU MUST PASS THIS
This License shall be governed by the laws of the location of the head office of the
DISCLAIMER ON WHENEVER YOU DISTRIBUTE THE WORK OR DERIVATIVE
Author or if the Author is an individual, the laws of location of the principal place of
WORKS.
residence of the Author.
Indemnity. You agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Author and the
If any provision of this License is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law, it
Publisher from and against any claims, suits, losses, damages, liabilities, costs, and
shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this
expenses (including reasonable legal or attorneys’ fees) resulting from or relating to
License, and without further action by the parties to this License, such provision shall
any use of the Work by You.
be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and
Limitation on Liability. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE enforceable.
LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER BE LIABLE TO YOU
ON ANY LEGAL THEORY FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS LICENSE OR THE
USE OF THE WORK OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF THE AUTHOR OR THE
PUBLISHER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Termination.

No term or provision of this License shall be deemed waived and no breach o libvorbis
consented to unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing and signed by the
http://www.xiph.org/vorbis/
party to be charged with such waiver or consent.
This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the Copyright (c) 2002-2004 Xiph.org Foundation
Work licensed herein. There are no understandings, agreements or representations Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
with respect to the Work not specified herein. The Author shall not be bound by any permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
additional provisions that may appear in any communication from You. This License
0 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
may not be modified without the mutual written agreement of the Author and You
conditions and the following disclaimer.
0 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
o libogg of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
http://www.xiph.org/ogg/ materials provided with the distribution.
0 Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may
Copyright (c) 2002, Xiph.org Foundation
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are specific prior written permission.
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
0 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
conditions and the following disclaimer. INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
0 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
materials provided with the distribution. LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
0 Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
specific prior written permission. OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF SUCH DAMAGE.
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR o Tremolo
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, http://wss.co.uk/pinknoise/tremolo
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON Copyright (C) 2002 – 2009 Xiph.org Foundation Changes Copyright (C) 2009 – 2010
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR Robin Watts for Pinknoise Productions Ltd
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
SUCH DAMAGE.

0 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
conditions and the following disclaimer. CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
0 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
materials provided with the distribution. DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
0 Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
specific prior written permission. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE SUCH DAMAGE.
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, o Mersenne Twister
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, http://www.math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp/~m-mat/MT/MT2002/CODES/mt19937ar.c
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR Copyright (C) 1997 – 2002, Makoto Matsumoto and Takuji Nishimura,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT All rights reserved.
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
SUCH DAMAGE. permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
o Tremor conditions and the following disclaimer.
http://wiki.xiph.org/index.php/Tremor Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
Copyright (c) 2002, Xiph.org Foundation provided with the distribution.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are The names of its contributors may not be used to endorse or promote products
permitted provided that the following conditions are met: derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
0 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
0 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
0 Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND o cURL

CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
http://curl.haxx.se
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR Copyright (c) 1996 – 2011, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT All rights reserved.
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, permission notice appear in all copies.
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
o zlib AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES
OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
http://www.zlib.net/ OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
zlib.h -- interface of the “zlib” general purpose compression library version 1.2.3, July SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
18th, 2005 Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
Copyright (C) 1995 – 2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software
This software is provided “as-is”, without any express or implied warranty. In no event without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including o c-ares
commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the http://c-ares.haxx.se
following restrictions:
Copyright 1998 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you
wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation
in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright
notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission
Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be
notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used
misrepresented as being the original software.
in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific,
This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. written prior permission. M.I.T. makes no representations about the suitability of this
Jean-loup Gailly jloup@gzip.org, Mark Adler madler@alumni.caltech.edu software for any purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.

o License information for the software used in

the unit
About GPL (GNU-General Public License), LGPL (GNU Lesser
General Public License) License
This product uses GPL/LGPL software and software made by other
companies.
After you purchase this product, you may procure, modify or distribute
the source code of the GPL/LGPL software that is used in the product.
Denon provides the source code based on the GPL and LPGL
licenses at the actual cost upon your request to our customer service
center.
However, note that we make no guarantees concerning the source
code.
Please also understand that we do not offer support for the contents of
the source code.

.
www.denon.com 3520 10433 00ADA
Copyright © 2016 D&M Holdings Inc. All Rights Reserved.
274
ENGLISH
FRANÇAIS
AVR-X1300W ESPAÑOL
Quick Start Guide

*XLGHGHFRQğJXUDWLRQUDSLGH*XâDGHFRQğJXUDFLöQUÀSLGD
Read Me First....
Lisez-moi en premier.... / Lea esto primero....
Check our AVR setup tips online

Usa.denon.com/SetupTips
Ca.Denon.com/SetupTips
Please do not return this unit to the
store. Call for Assistance
If you need help… 1-855-MY.DENON (USA) 1-855-693-3666
1-800-668-0652 (Canada)
Monday – Friday 10:00AM to 10:00PM E.S.T
Saturday 12:00PM to 8:00PM E.S.T
Welcome Before You Begin
Thank you for choosing a Denon AV
receiver. This guide provides step-by-
Required for Setup
step instructions for setting up your AV
receiver.
TV Speaker cables
HDMI cable Subwoofer cable Speakers
Optional
or
LAN cable Wi-Fi router
• When connecting this unit to a device that is compatible with the Deep Color, 4K and ARC
functions, use a “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet” that displays the HDMI logo.
• These drawings are for illustrative purposes only and may not represent the actual product(s).
1
What’s In the Box
Quick Start Guide FM indoor antenna
Safety Instructions AM loop antenna
Notes on radio Sound calibration

microphone
Warranty Sound calibration
(for North America microphone stand
model only)
Cable labels Remote control unit
Receiver R03/AAA batteries
Power cord
The included sound calibration microphone stand is convenient for use when
performing Speaker Calibration. Using your own tripod or the supplied Sound
calibration microphone stand enables settings to be automatically configured to
the optimum listening environment, providing exceptionally high performance.
2
Setup Installing batteries in the
There are three steps to the setup
1 remote control unit
process.
1 Installing batteries in the remote control unit
2 Connecting the receiver
3 Following the On-Screen Setup Assistant

Batteries
3
2 Connecting the receiver
1) Place the receiver near your TV and
connect the power cord
TV
Receiver
Power cord
(supplied)
Connect to household
power outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
4
2) Connect the receiver to your home network
Wired LAN Wireless LAN
Connect an Ethernet cable (not included) between your Rotate the two antennas located on the back of the receiver
receiver and your network router. upwards for maximum performance.
To LAN port
Router
5
3) Connect the receiver to your TV with 4) Turn on the TV
an HDMI cable
HDMI IN
$5&
HDMI cable
OR
NIT
MO RC
A TV remote control unit
HDMI OUT
MONITOR
$5& 5) Select the appropriate HDMI input on
your TV
HDMI
TV/
INPUT or
VIDEO
Receiver (Rear panel)
ARC (Audio Return Channel) :
If your TV supports ARC, your TV can send audio back to the AV receiver
when you are using your TV’s built-in video sources (TV tuner, Smart TV
streaming services, etc…) ARC requires that you enable HDMI CEC on
your TV. Please refer to your TV’s Owner’s Manual for instructions on how
to setup HDMI CEC. Note that some TV manufacturers use other names
for the HDMI CEC function. TV remote control unit
6
6) Turn on the receiver 7) Verify the connection
• Press X to turn on the receiver. • Verify that you can see this screen on your TV.
Setup Assistant
Please select a language...
English
Français
Español
If this screen is not displayed, please go back and retry

the steps again in the recommended sequence.
7
3 Following the On-Screen Setup Assistant
The Setup Assistant will walk you through connecting and
configuring your speakers and components to your Denon
Setup Assistant
receiver. Please use the remote control and follow the
Please select a language...
on-screen instructions.
English
Français
Español
ENTER
8
Owner’s Manual All New “Denon 2016
• For more information, visit www.denon.com.
• Refer to the Online Manual for other functions
AVR Remote” App
information and operation procedure details.
manuals.denon.com/AVRX1300W/NA/EN/ The “Denon 2016 AVR Remote” App allows you to remotely
control your Denon receiver wirelessly from your iOS,
Android, or Kindle mobile devices. Please visit the Apple App
Store, Google Play, or the Amazon Appstore and search for
“Denon 2016 AVR Remote” to get your free copy.
Online Manual
English Contents
Overview WEB Manual

Connections
Playback
AVR-X1300W
Settings
Tips
Appendix
PDF
PDF Download

Copyright c 2016 D&M Holdings Inc. All Rights Reserved.
9
www.denon.com
Printed in Vietnam 5411 11364 00AD

Montageanleitung Mikrofonstii.nder Montage-instructies Microfoonstatief '<' -1'? A ?I/ H\!l#tcrmBJHI
Instructions d'assemblage du support de microphone Monteringsanvisning for mikrofonstii.ll t:~JXI.~~m ~~JI.a,EJ
Microphone Stand Assembly Instructions lstruzioni per il montaggio del supporto microfono liiHCTPYKL1~111 no c6opKe CTO~K~ nag M~KpO<j>OH
lnstrucciones de montaje del soporte del micr6fono lnstrukcje montazu stojaka na mikrofon CQE1A657Y
1 2 3
4
PRODUCT INFORMATION
AVR-X1300W 7.2CH AV SURROUND RECEIVER
THE FULL-FEATURED HOME THEATER ENTRY

Experience the latest home theater audio formats with the AVR-X1300W 7.2 channel Dolby Atmos® AV receiver, which delivers breathtaking immersive surround sound
with today’s advanced movie soundtracks.
HIGHLIGHTS YOUR BENEFITS

• 7.2 channel AV Receiver with 80W per channel (8ohms, 20Hz – 20kHz with • Enough power to fill medium size rooms with unique Denon sound
0.08% T.H.D.)
• Built-in WiFi with 2.4GHz/5GHz dual band support; built-in Bluetooth • Improved network stability especially in Wi-Fi-crowded homes
• 4K/60 Hz full-rate pass-through, 4:4:4 color resolution, HDR and BT.2020 • Latest HDMI standard for future-proof compatibility
• 6 HDMI inputs (incl. 1 front) with full HDCP 2.2 support • Plenty of inputs for your Blu-ray Player, game console and more
• Dolby Atmos (up to 5.1.2) and DTS:X™ (via firmware update) • Blockbusting 3D sound with effects from overhead
• AirPlay®, Bluetooth, Internet Radio, Spotify Connect®, Pandora®, SiriusXM™, • Access to almost unlimited online music sources
Network Audio Streaming
• DSD (2.8/5.6MHz), FLAC, ALAC, AIFF and WAV support • High Resolution audio streaming for Hi-Fi enthusiasts even in Gapless
• Audyssey MultEQ XT, Dynamic Volume and Dynamic EQ delivering perfect equalization for your individual room
• Color-coded speaker terminals, Setup Assistant, Denon 2016 AVR Remote App • Hassle-free installation, setup and operation
• Intelligent ECO mode with off/on/auto setting • Energy-conscious without compromising on performance
usa.denon.com ca.denon.com
Powerful 7 Channel Discrete Amplifier with ECO Mode home with the AVR-X1300W, which features the ability to connect Audyssey Room Correction
Featuring high current discrete power output devices on all seven a 5.1 surround sound speaker system and 2 additional overhead As the first AV receiver manufacturer to embrace Audyssey’s ad-
channels, the AVR-X1300W is rated at 80 watts per channel. It’s speakers or 2 additional Dolby Atmos elevation speakers for the vanced DSP audio algorithms, Denon brings to the AVR-X1300W
also equipped with high-current low impedance drive capability, for ultimate home theater experience. the Audyssey Silver suite of DSP functions, which includes MultEQ
compatibility with the widest range of loudspeaker models (down XT, Dynamic EQ and Dynamic Volume. Audyssey MultEQ XT auto-
to 4 ohms). The ECO mode adjusts the power amplifier’s output ac- DTS:X: The latest immersive surround sound system, DTS:X fea- matic room acoustic measurement and correction system uses
cording to the volume level to reduce power consumption, with an tures similar object-based audio coding, and provides for overhead the supplied microphone and a test-tone sequence to match your
on-screen ECO meter providing real-time monitoring of the power- speakers to deliver a stunning surround sound experience. (DTS:X speakers to your room’s acoustics, giving the smoothest, most
saving. will be enabled via future firmware update: for more info, please natural tonal balance. The MultEQ XT system here provides greater
visit www.denon.com/dtsx). This includes both Dolby Surround and filter precision for the main and satellite speakers, with eight times
Built-in Bluetooth and Wi-Fi DTS Neural:X upmixing: users with a ‘3D’ sound speaker set-up are the resolution of the base MultEQ system, for up to 8 measure-
Featuring Bluetooth and Wi-Fi wireless streaming connectivity, able to get an enhanced surround experience from conventional ment locations to ensure the best sound for the whole family, not
the AVR-X1300W is equipped with an advanced dual antenna Dolby- or DTS-encoded content, or even music in stereo, using the just one ideal ‘sweet spot’. Audyssey Dynamic EQ uses advanced
system for robust and error-free streaming even in congested full set of speakers installed in the listening room. psychoacoustic algorithms to continually adjust tonal balance to
urban environments. Connected to the Internet through your deliver full range sound, even at lower volume levels; Audyssey
home Wi-Fi network (or with a hard-wired connection via the Latest HDMI 2.0a Connectivity; HDCP 2.2 Compatible Dynamic Volume smoothes out those annoying volume jumps – es-
RJ-45 Ethernet LAN port), it allows you to enjoy your favorite The AVR-X1300W’s six HDMI inputs, including one conveniently pecially from loud commercials – for an easier viewing experience.
tracks from streaming music services such as Spotify Connect, located on the front panel, all conform to the latest HDMI specifi-
Pandora, and SiriusXM. You can also choose from thousands of cations, including 4K Ultra HD 60Hz video, 4:4:4 Pure Color sub- Easy To Setup, Easy To Use
Internet radio stations from around the world, and enjoy music sampling, High Dynamic Range (HDR) and 21:9 video, 3D, and The AVR-X1300W’s clear, easy to understand graphical on-screen
and speech entertainment of virtually every genre. AirPlay lets BT.2020 pass-through support. The advanced video section also display guides you through the setup process to ensure the correct
you play your favorite tracks wirelessly from your iPod touch ®, features HDCP 2.2 compatibility, a requirement for 4K Ultra HD configuration. The exclusive Setup Assistant and the included Quick
iPhone ® or iPad ®, and via network streaming you can listen copy-protected content, ensuring the AVR-X1300W is ready for the Start guide together provide easy setup instructions, leading the
to music files stored on your home PC or Mac, or NAS devices. next generation of Blu-ray disc players, set-top boxes and other 4K user step by step to optimize critical settings for the best possible
The all-new Denon 2016 AVR Remote App lets you control the Ultra HD sources. sound and video quality with the rest of your system.
AVR-X1300W with your smartphone or tablet over a network con-
nection: it’s available for both Apple® iOS and Android™ devices. High Resolution Audio
Discover the incredible fidelity of high resolution audio tracks with
Dolby Atmos & DTS:X the AVR-X1300W’s ability to decode up to 24-bit/192-kHz lossless
Dolby’s revolutionary Dolby Atmos technology dispenses with the files (AIFF, FLAC and WAV; ALAC/Apple Lossless to 24-bit/96kHz),
channel-based surround sound coding used for decades, in favor as well as DSD 2.8MHz (the audiophile format of SACD) and now
of advanced object-based coding, giving the sound designer the 5.6MHz. Play them from memory devices via the front panel USB,
ability to place sounds precisely anywhere in the three-dimensional or from network sources – the AVR-X1300W will also play lossy file
soundspace. Now you can enjoy this award-winning technology at types such as MP3.
Technical Information Ports

Number of 7 (Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, S/N Ratio 98 dB (IHF-A weighted, DIRECT mode) IN HDMI (Front 1) x6
power amps Surround Back L/R) FM section Composite (video) x2
Power output 175 watts per channel Tuning frequency range 87.5 - 10 MHz Analog Audio x2
Maximum Power Output Per Channel AM section Digital Optical x2
120 watts per channel Tuning frequency range 52 kHz – 11 kHz Digital &RD[LDO x
(6 ohms, 1 kHz, THD 0.7%, 2ch driven) General USB (front) x1
80 watts per channel (8 ohms, Power supply AC 120 V, 60 Hz OUT HDMI Monitor x1
20 Hz - 20 kHz, THD 0.08%, 2ch driven) Power consumption 430 W Composite Monitor x1
Speaker impedance 4 - 16 ohms (Standby 0.1 W, CEC standby 0.5 W)
Audio Preout (SW) 0.2 ch
Preamplifier section Power consumption 29 W (ECO on), 39 W (ECO off) Zone 2 Preout 2.0ch
Input sensitivity/ 200 mV / 47 kohms No-Sound
Phones x1
impedance Dimensions (W x H x D) 17.1 x 5.9 x 13.3 inches OTHER Ethernet x1
Frequency response 10 Hz - 100 kHz — +1, –3 dB Weight 18.7 lbs. Microphone Port x1
(DIRECT mode) FM Tuner Antenna x1
$M Tuner Antenna x1
5HPRWH&RQWURO,1 x1
83&AVRX1300WBKE3 8-83795-00383-4
Black
®
Denon Electronics (USA), LLC. The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by D&M Holdings Inc. is under license.
D&M Canada Dolby, Dolby Atmos, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. • DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol, DTS:X, and the
100 Corporate Drive, Mahwah, New Jersey DTS:X logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. • The Spotify software is subject to third party
07430 USA licenses found here: www.spotify.com/connect/third-party-licenses • Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
TEL 201-762-6500 Denon is a trademark or registered trademark of D&M Holdings, Inc.
* All specs can be subject to change * Available only in Black
usa.denon.com ca.denon.com
|V01|
.-------------------------------------------------------------
FRONT L FRONT L
SURROUND L SURROUND L
' I
- -L - -L
SUBWOOFER 2 i SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND BACK R l SURROUND BACK R
t__________
I
------------ '
--------------------- I
----------
·----------------------- --------------------------------------------· C>Pl"IC>~~L ·---------------------------------------------------- ----------------,
I
FRONT HEIGHT L FRONT HEIGHT L I/

------------------------------------------------------------- ' I
FRONT HEIGHT R l
I
FRONT HEIGHT R
I
: Speaker Side Receiver Side I
l
I
L L I
R R
ZONE2 ZONE2
. I9CJ ZONE2 ZONE2
I
0
LiZll
I
1
c::J c=J I
TOP FRONT L 0 TOP FRONT R l

I
TOP FRONT R
-I9CJ 0 I
~
TOP MIDDLE L c::::J c:::J
1
TOP MIDDLE R l
I
TOP MIDDLE R
I
FRONT DOLBY L FRONT DOLBY R l FRONT DOLBY R

l [Q)~...--- 0 . ,9CJOJ I
i /
I
SURAOUfl) DOlJY L 11J L:J c::::J
SURROUND DOLBY R l SURROUND DOLBY R

~
I
·--------------------------------------------1 I ·--------------------------------------------·
I
'------------------------------------------------------------~'
I I
CBL/SAT l
I
CBL/SAT DVD I Blu-ray
I
:
I
DVD I Blu-ray
' I
MEDIA PLAYER l
I
MEDIA PLAYER MONITOR MONITOR Blu-ray
I
:
I
Blu-ray
I I
GAME :
I
GAME AUX :
I
AUX
I I
·---------------------------------------------------- -------------------- t-1[)~1 ----------------------------------------------------- -------------------

DE NON®
Thank you for your Denon AV receiver purchase!
Your receiver is DTS:X ready.

To enable DTS:X in your receiver, a firmware update is necessary.
Please visit http://www.denon.com/dtsx to learn more.
FRAN<;AIS
Merci pour votre confiance et l'achat de cet ampli-tuner AV Denon !

Pour beneficier de Ia performance DTS:X sur cet ampli-tuner, il vous suffit d' installer Ia
derniere mise a jour logicielle. Pour plus d' informations:
http://www.denon.com/_dlsx
ESPANOL
jGracias porIa compra de su receptor AV de Denon!

Su receptor esta preparado para DTS:X.
Para habilitar DTS:X en su receptor es necesario una actualizaci6n de firmware.
Por favor visite http://www.denonLcom/dtsx para ampliar informacion.
D&M Holdings Inc. 543110458 OOAD

ENGLISH Please Read Please keep this for future reference
We at Denon appreciate your business. Please accept our thanks for purchasing our product. Your satisfaction with our
product is our main concern. (A)
Information about firmware update
This unit has the ability to update its firmware over the internet. If an update is
interrupted or fails, a message (See below) may appear on the receiver front panel.
If a "Fail message" is displayed, restart your receiver by pressing and holding the
Power/Standby(<!>) button on the main unit for approx. 5 seconds (A). If this does not
work, unplug the power cord, wait 5 seconds, then reconnect the cord (B) .
(B)
~
I UPdate r··etr· / 0
Unplug
"Update retry" will appear on the display and the update will resume. If the problem
~~
persists, please visit our support page shown below for troubleshooting and other
firmware update methods. 8
WaitS sec
~
www.denon.com/update 8
Reconnect
FRAN<;AIS Alire Conserver pour reference ulterieure
Chez Denon, nous apprecions votre collaboration. Nous vous remercions d'avoir choisi notre produit.
Votre satisfaction est notre principale preoccupation.
(A)
a a
Informations relatives Ia mise jour du micrologiciel
Le micrologiciel de cet appareil peut etre mis a jour sur Internet. En cas d'interruption
ou d'echec d'une mise a jour, un message (voir ci-dessous) peut apparaitre sur le
panneau avant de l'ampli-tuner.
I UPdate Er-·r··or··
Si un "Message d'echec" s'affiche, appuyez sur Ia touche de mise sous tension/veille

(<!>)de l'appareil principal et maintenez-la enfoncee pendant 5 secondes environ pour
redemarrer votre ampli-tuner (A). Si cela ne fonctionne pas, debranchez le cordon (B)
~
d'alimentation, attendez 5 secondes, puis rebranchez-le (B). 0
Debrancher
"Update retry" s'affiche et Ia mise a jour reprend. Si le problema persiste, consultez

notre page d'assistance indiquee ci-dessous pour obtenir des informations sur le
depistage des ·pannes et obtenir d'autres informations relatives a Ia mise a jour du
~~ 8
Attendre 5 s
micrologiciel.
www.denon.com/update ~ 8
Rebrancher
ESPANOL Par Favor Leer Conserve este documento para utilizarlo como referencia en el futuro
Nosotros en Denon Apreciamos su negocio. Por favor, acepte nuestro agradecimiento por Ia compra de nuestro
producto. Su satisfacci6n con nuestro producto es nuestra principal preocupaci6n.
(A)
Informacion sobre Ia actualizaci6n del firmware
Esta unidad tiene Ia capacidad de actualizar su firmware por medio del internet.
Si Ia actualizaci6n se interrumpe o falla, un mensaje (Ver mas abajo) puede aparecer
en el panel frontal del recibidor.
I UPdate Error I
Si se muestra un "mensaje de fallo", reinicie el recibidor oprimiendo y manteniendo
· oprimido el bot6n de Encendido (<!>)en Ia unidad por aproximadamente 5 segundos (A).
Si esto no funciona, desconecte el cable de alimentaci6n, espere 5 segundos y luego
vuelva a conectarlo (B). (B) ~ ii:JI 0
Desconete
I !_!pd.:;te r·et.- /
"Update retry" aparecera en Ia pantalla y Ia actualizaci6n se reanudara. Si el problema

persiste, por favor visite nuestra pagina de red de soporte mostrada a continuaci6n ~~ Espe~sec
~
para otros metodos de actualizaci6n del firmware y soluci6n de problemas.
www.denon.com/update Conect!. nuevo
D&M Holdings Inc.

54311 0514 OOAD
The Denon Extended Protection Plan
Today's highly technical products are mechanically and electronically
complex, and even the best equipment may need periodic attention that
can result in costly repair bills. With the Denon Extended Protection Plan,
there are no deductibles or hidden charges. Best of all, if your Denon
product is unrepairable, we will replace it, absolutely free with a unit that
has similar features and functionality.
Don't delay! You must extend your coverage before your factory
warranty expires. To extend your warranty, simply log on to our website:
http://servicecontracts.denon.com, or call us toll-free at {855) 720-0823.
(US Residents Only)
Features & Benefits
• 1 00°/o coverage on parts & labor • Service representatives
• If unrepairable, we'll replace it! available to assist you
24 hours a day
• No deductibles or hidden charges
• No Lemon guarantee
• Power surge protection
• Fully insured
• Unlimited service calls
• Fully transferable
• Nationwide authorized service
center network
To start your Extended Protection Plan coverage:
1. Call us toll-free at (855) 720-0823 (US Residents Only)

Have your model number, serial number,
and purchase receipt available when calling.
2. Log on to http://servicecontracts.denon.com

Safety Instructions (Read these safety instructions before operating the unit .) DE NON
0 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CAUTION: CAUTIONS ON INSTALLATION
To completely disconnect this product from the mains. disconnect the plug from the wall socket out let. For proper heat dispersal, do not install this unit in a confined space. such as a bookcase or similar
The mains plug is used to completely interrupt the power supply to the unit and must be w1thin easy enclosure.
access by the user. • Amphf1er: 0.3 m or more
• Other units: 0.1 m or more
PRECAUTION:
Pour deconnecter compl€tement ce produit du courant secteur, debranchez Ia prise de Ia prise murale PRECAUTIONS D'INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Pour permettre Ia dissipation de chaleur requise. n'installez pas cette unite dans un espace confine tel
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. 00 NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE La prise secteur est utilisee pour couper completement !'alimentation de l'appareil et l'utilisateur doit
pouvoir y acceder facilement. qu·une biblioth€que au un endroit similaire
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL
• Amplificateur: 0,3 m ou plus
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to PRECAUCION: • Autres appareils: 0,1 m ou plus
the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's ellclosure that may be of sufficient Para desconectar completamente este producto de Ia alimentaci6n electrica, desconecte el enchufe del EMPLAZAMIENTO DE LA INSTALACION
magnitude to constitute a risk of electnc shock to persons. enchufe de Ia pared Para Ia dispersiOn del calor adecuadamente, no instale este equipo en un Iugar confinado tal como una
El enchufe de Ia alimentac16n el€ctrica se utiliza para interrumpir por completoel suministro de alimentaciOn libreria o un1dad similar.
el9ctrica a Ia unidad y debe de encontrarse en un Iugar al que el usuario tenga filci1acceso. • Amplificador: 0,3 m o mas
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing I instructions in the literature accompanying the appl1ance. • Otras unidades: 0,1 m o mas
ATEN(:AO:
Para desligar este produto completamente da tomada de al im e nta~ao, retire a ficha da tomada de PRECAU(:OES DE INSTALA(:AO
WARNING: al i men:a~ao. Para uma correcta dispersao do calor, nao mstale esta unidade num espa~o confinado, como uma estante
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK. 00 NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. A ficha da tomada de a l i menta~ao e utilizada para cortar comple:amente a alimentalt80 de corrente a de livros ou uma estrutura semelhante.
unidade e tern de estar facilmente acessfvel ao utilizador. • Amplificador: 0.3 m au mais
0 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS • Outros unidades: 0.1 m ou mais
1. Read these mstructiOns.
2. Keep these instructions.
3 Heed all warnings. 0 NOTES ON USE I OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L'UTILISATION I NOTAS SOBRE EL USO INOTAS SOBRE A UTILIZA<;:AO
4. Follow all instructions.
5 Do not use this apparatus near water. WARNINGS AVERTISSEMENTS ADVERTENCIAS AVISOS
6 Clean only with dry cloth.
7 Do not block any ventilation openings • Avoid higt' temperatures • Eviter des temperatures elevees. • Evite altas temperaturas. • Ev1te temperaturas altas
Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions Allow for sufficient heat d1spersion when Tenir compte d'une dispersion de chaleur Permite Ia suf1ciente dispersiOn del calor cuando Assegure uma suficiente dispersao do calor
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus {including amplifiersI installed in a rae~:: suffisante Iars de I' installation sur une etagere esta instalado en Ia consola. quando a unidade for instalada numa prateleira
that produce heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one • Handle the power cord carefully. • Manipuler le cordon d'alimentation avec • Maneje el cordOn de energfa con cuidado • Manuseie o cabo de alimentaQiio com cuidado.
®
wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the Hold the plug when unplugging the cord. precaution. Sostenga el enchufe cuando desconecte el Puxe pela ficha quando desligar o cabo de
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for • Keep the unit free from mOISture. water, and Tenir Ia prise Iars du d8branchement du cordon. cord6n de energia alimenta~ao.
replacement of the obsolete outlet. dust • Proteger l'appareil contre l'humidite, l'eau et Ia • Mantenga el eqUipo libre de humedad, agua y • Mantenha a unidade afastada da humidade, da
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point • Unplug the power cord when not using ~he unit poussiere polvo. agua e do p6.
where they exit from the apparatus. for long periods of time. • oeorancher le cordon d'alimentatlan lorsq ue • Desconecte el cordOn de energfa cuando no • Desligue o cabo de alimentar,;ao quando nao
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. ~
• Do not obstruct the ventilation holes. l'appareil n'est pas utilise pendant de longues utilice el equipo par mucho tiempo. estiver a utilizar a unidade por longos periodos de
12. ~~ea~~~r~~~- t.~h~~r~ ~~~1~ ~~eO:· ub;:c~eCti~~ ~~~:.ns~~~~i~g t~~ t~r:a~:~~~~~r~~~~i~~~~o~i~~ • • Do not let foreign objects into the unit. p8nodes • No obstruya los orificios de ventilaci6n. tempo.
~~0~1u~jt~~ ~~~r~~~~v~~~mg lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. ~
• Do not let insecticides, benzene, and thinner • Ne pas obstruer .es trous d'aeration. • No deje objetos extrarios dentro del equipo. • Nao obstrua as orificios de ventilar,;ao.
13. :.a r. come in contact with the unit. • Ne pas laisser des objets etrangers dans • No permita el contacto de insecticidas. gasolina y • Nao deixe objectos estranhos dentro da unidade
14. Refer all servic1ng to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been ~ • Never disassemble or modify the unit 1n any way. l'appareil. diluyentes con el equipo. • Niio permita que insectic1das. benzina e diluente
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged. liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into
• Ventilation should not be Impeded by covering • Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides, du • Nunca desarme o modifique el equipo de ninguna entrem em contacto com a unidade.
the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
15. Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine. fire or the like. tl''<e ventilation openings with items. such as benzene et un diluant avec l'appareil. manera. • Nunca desmonte ou modifique de alguma forma
newspapers. tablecloths or curtains • Ne jamais demonter ou modifier l'appareil d'une • La ventilaci6n no debe quedar obstruida por a unidade.
• Naked flame sources such as lighted candles maniE!re ou d'une autre. haberse cubierto las apenuras con objetos como • A ventilacao 11cio deve ser obstruida. tapando
':1 FCC INFORMATION (For US customers) should not be placed on the un1t • Ne pas recouvrir les orif1ces de ventilation avec peri6dicos, manteles o cortinas. as aberturas de ventilaltao com objectos. como
1. COMPUANCE INFORMATION • Observe and follow local regulat;ons regarding des objets tels que des journaux, nappes ou • No deberan colocarse sabre el aparato fuentes jornais, toalhas ou cortlnas
This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: {1) this
product may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received. including battery disposal. rideaux. Cela entraverait Ia ventilafon inflamables sin protecci6n, como velas • Nao devem ser colocadas junto a unidade fontes
interference that may cause undesired operation • Do not expose the unit to dripping or splashing • Ne jamais placer de flam me nue sur l'appareil. encend1das de chama aberta, como velas acesas
Denon Electronics (USA). LLC (a D&M Holdings Company) fluids. notamment des bougies allumees. • A Ia hora de deshacerse de las pilas, respete Ia • Respeite as regulamenta~Oes locais relativas a
100 Corporate Drive, Mahwah, NJ 07430-2041 • Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as a
• Veillez respecter les lois en vigueur lorsque normativa para el cuidado del media ambients. ellmmacao de p1lhas.
Tel. 12011762-6665 vases. on the unit. vous jetez les piles usagees. • No exponer el aparato al goteo o salpicaduras • Nao exponha a unidade a gotejamento au salpicos
2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT
This product. when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in ~his manual, meets FCC requirements.
• Do not handle the mains cord with wet hands a
• L'apparell ne doit pas eue expose l'eau au a cuando se utilice. de liquidos.
Modification not expressly approved by Denon may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. • When the switch is in the OFF !STANDBY) l'humidite • No colocar sabre el aparato objetos 11enos de • Nao coloque objectos com liquidos, como jarras.
3. NOTE position. the equipment is not completely • Ne pas poser d'objet contenant du liquide, par liquido. como jarros. em c1ma da unidade
This product nas been tested and 1ound to comply with the limits for a Class B digital dev1ce. pursuant to Part 15 of sw1tched off from MAI NS. exemple un vase. sur l'appareil. • No maneje el cable de alimentaci6n con las • Nao manuseie o cabo de alimentaltao com as
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential • The equipment shall be installed near the • Ne pas manipuler le cordon d'alimentation avec manos mojadas maos molhadas
installation. power supoly so that the power supply is easily les mains mouillees. • Cuando el interrupter esta en Ia posiciOn OFF • Quando o interrupter se encontra na posic;flo
This product generates. uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
accessible. • Lorsque l'interrupteur est sur Ia position OFF (STANDBY), el equipo no esta completamente OFF !STANDBY), o equipamento nao esta
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause harmful mterference to radio or television • Do not keep the battery 1n a place exposed to (STANDBY). l'appareil n'est pas completement desconectado de Ia alimentaciOn MAINS. completamente desligado da REDE ELECTRICA
reception, wh1ch can be determined by turn1ng the product OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct the direct sunlight or in places w ith extremely high deconnecte du SECTEUR (MAINS). • El equipo se instalarci cerca de Ia fuente de !MAINS!
interference by one or more of the following measures: temperatures, such as near a heater • L'appareil sera install€! pres de Ia source aiimentaciOn de manera que resulte tacil acceder • 0 equipamento deve ser instalado junto da fonte
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna • Do not bend forcedly the plug on the equipment d'alimentation, de sorte que cette derniere soit a ella de alimema.:;ao, para que a fonte de alimentaG<iO
• Increase the separation between the eqUipment and receiver for the Connection between the connector and facilement accessible. • No coloque las pilas en un Iugar expuesto a esteja facilmente acessivel.
• Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the local retailer aJthorized to distribute this type of product or an experienced radio I TV technician for help. micro USB/USB cable. • Ne placez pas Ia pile dans un endroit expose a Ia luz directa del sol o donde Ia temperatura • Nao mantenha a pilha num local directamente
4. IMPORTANT (For Network model) Ia lumiE!re directe du solei! au dans des endroits sea extremadamente alta. como cerca de una exposto aluz solar ou em locais com temperaturas
When connecting this product to network hub or router, use only a shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable which is available presentant des temperatures extremement calefacciOn extremamente elevadas, tal como perto de um
at retailer. 8!evees, par exemple pres d'un radiateur. • No doble a Ia fuerza Ia clavija del equipo para Ia aquecedor.
Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your authority, granted by the FCC. to use • Ne pliez pas Ia fiche sur l'appareil en fon:;ant pour conexi6n entre el conector y el cable micro USB/ • N8o dobre forcedly o plugue do equipamento para
the product.
connecter Ia borne au cable micro USB/USB USB. a conexao entre o conector e cabo USB I micro
5. CAUTION (For Bluetooth/Wi-Fi model)
• To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirement. separation distance of at least 20 em must be maintained USB.
between this product and all persons.
• This product and its antenna must not be co-IOU"lted or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter
0 IC INFORMATION (For Canadian customers) D&M Holdings Inc.
543 1 10359 40AD
CAN ICES-31BI I NMB-3 1BI
CAUTION (FOR AMPLIFIER) : CAUTIONS ON USING BATTERIES AVISOS SOBRE DE LAS PILAS
HOT SURFACE. DO NOT TOUCH . • Insert the specified batteries in the remote control unit. • lntroduzca las pilas especificadas en el mando a dis tancia
The top surface over the internal heat sink may become hot when operating th is product continuously. • Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate even when the • Ponga pilas nuevas si el eq uipo no f unciona ni siquie ra si el mando a distancia se
Do not touch hot areas, especial ly around the "Hot suriace mark" and the top panel. remote control unit is operated close to t he unit . (The supplied batteries are only pone muy cerca. {las pilas que se entregan con Ia unidad solo sirven pa ra verificar
for verifying operation. Replace them w ith new batteries at an ea rly date.) que func iona . cambielas por pilas nuevas lo antes posible. )
Hot • Cuando inserte las baterfas, asegUrese de hacerlo en Ia direcci6n correcta, segUn
PRECAUTION (POUR AMPLIFICATEUR) : • When inserting the batte ries, be su re to do so in the proper direction, followi ng the
SURFACE CHAUDE. NE PAS TOUCHER.
surface @a nd e marks in the battery compartment las ma rcas $ y e en el comparti mi ento de bater las.
mark • To prevent damage or leakage of battery fl uid : • Para evita r dalios o derrames del fluido de Ia bateria:
La surface sup9rieure du dissipateu r de chaleur peut devenir chaude si vous utilisez ce produit en continu.
• Do not use a new battery together with an old one. • No utilice una nueva bateria jun to con una ya utiliza da.
Ne touchez pas les zones chaudes, tout particu li6rement vers !'inscription "Hot surface mark" et le pannea u superieur
• Do not use two different types of batteries. • No utilice dos tipos diferentes de baterfas.
PRECAUCI6N (PARA EL AMPLIFICADOR): • Do not attempt to charge dry batte ries. • No intente cargar baterias secas
• Do not short-circuit. disassemble, hea t or dispose of batteries in flames • No corte circuite. desensamble, caliente o queme las baterfas .
SUPERFICIE CALIENTE. NO TOCAR.
• Do not keep the battery in a place exposed to direct sunlight or in places with • No co loque las pilas en un Iuga r expuesto a Ia luz directa del sol o donde Ia
La superficie superior sabre el disipador de calor interne podria llega r a calentarse al operar este producto de forma cont1nua. temperatura sea extremadamente alta, como cerca de una calefacci6n.
extremely high temperatures, such as near a heater.
No toque las areas calie ntes. especialmente las situadas alrededor de Ia "Hot surface mark" y del pane l superior • If the battery fluid sho uld leak, carefully w ipe the fluid off the in side of t he batte ry • Si hay flu ido de bateria, limpie cuidadosamente el fluido en el compart im iento de
compartment and insert new batteries. las bate rias e inserte unas nuevas.
CUIDADO (PARA 0 AMPLIFICADOR): • Remove the batteries f rom the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long • Reti re las baterfas de l mando a distancia si no lo va a utilizar por una largo periodo
SUPERFiCIE QUENTE. NAO TOCAR. periods . rje tiempo.
A face su perior loca lizada par cima do dissipador interne de ca lor pede ficar quente ao funcionar com este produto em modo continuo. • Used batteries should be disposed of in accordance w it h the local regulations • Las p ilas usadas deben desecharse de acuerdo a las regulaciones loca les
a
Nao tocar nas zonas quentes, especia lmente volta do "Hot su rface mark" e no painel superior regard in g battery disposal concernientes al desecho de pilas.
• The rem ote cont rol unit may function improperly if rechargeable batte ries are • Puede que el mando a distancia no f uncione cor rectamente si se utilizan pilas
used. recargables .
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT (FOR DISC PLAYER) PRECAUTIONS RELATIVES A !'UTILISATION DES PILES CUIDADOS NA UTILIZAc;:Ao PILHAS
CAUTION : • lnserez les pi les sp8cifi8es dans Ia t818commande. • Coloque as p ilhas indicadas na unidade de controlo remote
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PR OCEDURES OTHER THAN "CLASS 1 • Remplacez les piles si l'appareil ne fonction ne pas meme lorsque Ia t818commande • Substitua as pilhas por novas se o conjunto nao f uncionar mesmo accionando a
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESU LT IN HAZARDOUS RAD IATION EXPOSURE LASER PRODUCT" est act ionnee a proxim it8 . {Les piles fournies ne serven t qu'aux operations de unidade de contro lo remota prOximo da unidade. (As pilhas fornecidas destinam-
THIS PRODUCT SHOULD NOT BE ADJUSTED OR RE PAIRED BY ANYONE EXCEPT PROPERLY verification. Remp lacez-les par des piles neuves sans attendre.) a
se ape nas ve rif icac;ao do correcto fu ncioname nto da unidade .)
QUALI FIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Lorsque vous inserez les pi les, ass urez-vous de les placer dans le bon sens . en • Ao co loca r as pilhas, certifique-se de que as co loca na direcc;ao correcta. segu indo
respectan t les marq ues @ et e a
qui figurent dans le compartiment piles . as indicac;6es EB e e ex istentes no com partimento das pilhas
PRODUIT LASER CLASSE 1 (POUR LECTEUR DE DISQUE) • Pour Sviter un endommagement de Ia t81€commande ou une fuite du liquide des • Pa ra evitar danos ou derrame de lfquido das pi lhas:
ATTENTION: piles: • Nao utilize uma pilha nova em conjunto com uma usada
L'UTILISATION DE COMMANDES, DE REGLAGES OU DE PERFORMANCE DE PROCEDURES AUTRES QUE CELLE S SPECIFIEES ICI PEUT • Ne pas m81anger piles neuves et anc iennes . • Nao utilize dois tipos diferentes de pilhas.
ENTRAiNER UNE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE ADES RAD IATIONS. • Ne pas utiliser deux types de piles differents . • Nao tente carregar pilhas secas .
CE PRODUIT DOlT UNIQUEMENT ETRE REGLE OU RE PARE PAR UN PERSONNEL DE SERVICE SUFFISAMMENT QUALIFIE. • Ne pas essayer de charger de piles seches • Nao fa<;:a a ligaGEIO em curto-circuito, nao desmonte, nao aque<;:a nem queime as
• Ne pas court-ci rcu iter. d8monter, chauffer ou brU ier les piles. pi lhas numa fogueira
PRODUCTO LASER DE CLASE 1 (PARA EL REPRODUCTOR DE DISCOS) • Ne placez pas Ia pi le dans un endroit expose a Ia lumiere directe du so lei I ou dans • Nao coloque as pilhas num loca l exposto a luz directa do so l nem em locais
PRECAUCI6N : des endroi ts pr€sentant des temperatures extrBmement 81ev8es, par exemple com tempe raturas extremamente elevadas como, por exemplo, prOximo de um
EL USO DE CONTROLES, AJUSTES, 0 LA REALIZAC16N DE PROCEDIMIENTOS DI STINTOS A LOS AQUi ESPECIFICADOS, PUEDE PROVOCAR pres d'un radiateur. aquecedor.
UNA EXPOSICI6N PELIGROSA A LA RADIACI6N . • En cas de fuite du liquide de pile, essuyez soigne useme nt l'int€ rieur du • Em case de derrame de lfquido das pilhas, limpe cuidadosamente o liqu ido do
ESTE PRODUCTO NO DEBE SER AJUSTADO 0 REPARADO POR NINGUNA PERSONA EXCEPTO POR PERSONAL DE SERVICIO DEBIDAMENTE compartiment avant d 'inserer de nouvelles piles. interior do compartimento das pilhas e coloque pilhas novas
CUALIFICADO. • 6tez les piles de Ia t818commande si vous ne l'utilisez pas pe ndant longtemps. • Retire as pi lhas da unidade de contro lo remote case nao a va utilizar duran te
• Veui llez vous d8barrasse r des piles usagees conformemen t aux lois locales longos pe rfodos de tempo.
PRODUTO LASER DE CLASSE 1 (PARA LEITOR DE DISCOS) a
re latives Ia mise au rebut des pi les . • As pilhas usadas devem ser descartadas em conformidade com os regulamentos
CUIDADO: • La tSiecommande risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement en cas d'utilisation a
locais re latives eliminac;ao de pil has/baterias
0 USO DE CONTROLOS, AJUSTES OU DESEMPENHO DE PROCEDIMENTOS QUE NAO OS AOUI ESPECIFICADOS PODE RESULTAR EM de piles rechargeables. • A unidade de control a remote podera nao funcionar correctamente se forem
EXPOSICAO A RADIACAO PERIGOSA. ut ilizadas pil has recarregave is.
ESTE PRODUTO NAO DEVE SER AJUSTADO OU REPARADO POR NINGUEM EXCEPTO POR PESSOAL TECNICO DEVIDAMENTE OUALI FICADO .
WARNING : PROPOSITION 65 WARNING (California only)

DO NOT INGEST BATIERY, CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD This product contains a ch emical known to the State of California to cause cancer
• The remote control supplied with this product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, and birth defects or othe r reproductive harm .
it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and ca n lead to death. For more information go to www.p65warninqs.ca .qov
• Keep new and used batteries away from children . If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product
and keep it away from children. If you th ink batteries mig ht have swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek
immediate Medical attention.
AVERTISSEMENT:
N'INGEREZ PAS LA PILE, RISQUE DE BRUL URE CH IMIQUE
• La te lecommande fournie avec ce produ it con tient une pile bouton. Une ingestion de Ia pile bouton risque de ca user de severes brUlures internes
a
en peine 2 heu res et peut entraTner Ia mort.
a
• Conservez les piles neuves et usagees hers de portee des enfants. Si le compartiment piles ne se ferme pas de maniere securisee, arretez
d'utiliser le prod uit et conservez-le hors deportee des enfants. Si vous pensez que des piles ant ete ingerees ou placees dans n'importe quel
orifice corporeI, contactez immediatement une assistance medicale
ADVERTENCIA:
NO INGERIR LA BATERiA. RI ESGO DE QUEMADURAS POR PRODUCTOS QUiMICOS
• El control remota suministrado con este producto contiene una p1la de bot6n. En case de ingestiOn, Ia pila de bot6n puede causar quemaduras
internas graves en solo 2 horas y puede ocasionar Ia muerte
• Mantenga las pilas nuevas y usadas Iuera del alcance de los nilios. Si el compa rtimento de Ia pila no se cierra firmemente, deje de uti lizar el
producto y mant8nga lo Iuera del alcance de los ni lios. Si cree que se han pod ido ingerir pilas, o las mismas se encuentran en alguna parte en el
interior del cuerpo, solic1te atenci6n m8dica de inmediato.
AVISO:
NAO INGIRA A PILHA, PERIGO DE QUEIMADURA QUiMICA
• 0 controlo remota fornecido com este prod uto contem uma pilha de cEllula moeda/botao. Se a pi lha de celula moeda/botao for engolida, pede
a
causar queimad uras internas graves em apenas 2 horas e pede levar morte.
• Mantenha as pilhas novas e usadas Ionge das criant;as. Se o compartimento da pilha nao fechar com firmeza, pare de utilizar o produto e
mantenha-o afastado das criant;as. Se pensa que as pi lhas possam ter side engolidas ou colocadas dentro de qua lquer pa rte do corpo, procure
ajuda medica imediata .
DE NON
www.denon.com
Notes on radio DENON
FCC Information (For US customers) IC Information (For Canadian customers)

-4•- (ENGLISH(
( E: <D
(SVENSKA(
1. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION 1. PRODUCT 1. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 1. 6VERENSSTAMMELSESINTVG
Our products tol lowrng the provisions of EC/EU d1rect1ves. that as follows; VMa produkter uppfyller fO IJande foreskrilter i EC/EU·d1re ktiv
• Product Name: Integrated Network AV Receiver CONTAINS TRANSMITIER MODULE IC: 2581A-CV920C
R&TTE D irect1ve 1999/5/EC R& TIE Directive 1999/5/EC
• Model Number: This product complies w 1th RSS-247 of Industry Canada. Operat1on rs subject to the fo llow1ng two
cond1t ions: (1) this product may not cause harmful interference. and m
t his product must accep t 2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: 00 NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT 2. VIKTIGT: APPARATEN FAR INTE MODIFIERAS
AVR· S720W I AVR· X1300W I AVR-$920W I AVR-X2300W J AVR-X3300W This produc t. w hen instal led as Indicated in the instructions con tarned in this manual, meets R&TIE Under fdrutsiittning attapparaten rnstalle rasenllgtanvisn1ngarna idenna bruksanvisnrng, uppfyl ler
any Interference received, rncluding interference that rnay cause undesrred opera t1on . This Class B
• CONTAINS TRANSMITTER MODULE FCC ID: Z00-CY920C d'recti ve requ irements. M odificat1on of the produ ct cou ld result in hazardous Radio and EMC denna kraven i R&TTE-direktivet. Ev. modiliering av appara ten ka n resultera 1 farl1g radio- och
digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003
This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two radiat1on. elektromagnetiskstrillnrng .
conditions: Ill this product may not cause harmful interfe rence. and 12) this product must accept 2. CAUTION 3. CAUTION 3, F6RSIKTIGT
anv interference received, 1rtcluding mterference that may cause undes,red operation To reduce poten tial radio Interference to other users, the antenna type and 1ts garn should be so
Separation d1stance of at least 20 em must be mainta1ned between th rs product and all persons Se 1111 att det frnns ett avst1tnd pi~ m inst 20 em mellan apparatens och personer i omgrvningen
chosen that the equivalent 1Sotr op1cal ly radiated power te.1.r p.) 1s not more than that perm1tted for
Denon Electronics (USA). LLC This product and its antenna must not be co -located or operatrng in conJunction w 1th any other Apparaten och dess antenn iflr rnte placeras el ler anvandas i n.iirheten av andra antenner eller
successful communica tiOn .
(a D & M Holdings Company) s.iindare
[i) the device for operation in the band 5,150 - 5,250 MHz rs on ly fo r indoor use to reduce the
100 Corporate Drive
potential for harmful interference to co-channe l mobile sa tellite systems. (DEUTSCH( IPYCCKHHI
Mahwah. NJ 07430-2041
Tel . (201)762-6665 li1l high-power radarsareallocatedaspnmaryusers(i.e pnorrtyuserslofthebands5,250-5.350 1. OBEREINSTIMMUNGSERKLARUNG 1. CEPTH<DHKAT COOTBETCTBHR
MHz and 5.650 - 5.850 MHz and that these radars cou ld cause interference and/or damage to Unsere Produkte unterliegen den Bestimmungen der fol genden EG/EU -Rich tl1 n1en: Hawr-1 npOI\YKTbl COOTBeTC TBYIO T ClleAyiOWI-1 M nono>KeHWlMI-1 A11PeKTI-1Bbl E3C/EC
2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT LE·LANdevices R&TIE Di rectrve 1999/5/EC R&TIE Direc ti ve 1999/5/EC
This product. when instal led as indicated in the instructions con tamed in th is manual, meets FCC 2. WICHTIGER HINWEIS: NEHMEN SIE KEINE VERANDERUNGEN AN DIESEM 2. BAlKHOI HE H3MEHAHTE AAHHbiH nPOAYKT
requ rrements . Mod1f1cat1on not expressly approved by Denon may vord your au thonty, granted by npOAyKT, yCTaHOB/l€HHl>li1 COrnaCHO lo1HC TPYKLI1-1AM 8 HaCTOAWeM pyKOBOACTBe, OTBe'"aeT
PRODUKTVOR
the FCC. to use the product Informations sur IC (pour les clients canadiens) Tpe6oeaHW1M I\lo1pe~ Tio1 Bl>l R&TTE . V1JM eHeHio1e npOI\yKTa MO>KeT npf.199CTI-1 K nOABneHI-110 OllaCHOrO
Wenn d1eses Produkt entsprechend d ,eser Bedienungsanle1tung au fgebaut wird. entspricht es den
3. IMPORTANT (For Network) An torderungen der R&TTE-Richtl1n1e Veranderungen am Produkt konnen zu gefiihrlicher Funk - und J/leKTpOMarHio1THOf0 113/l'f-leHHA
1. APPAREIL
When connecting thrs product to network hub or router, use only a shrelded STP or ScTP LAN cab le CONTIENT MODULE EMETTEUR IC: 2581A-CV920C EMV-Strah lungfuhren 3. nPEAYnPElKAEHHE
wh ich is available at retai ler Follow all installation instructions. Failure to fo llow rnstr uctions cou!d Cet appareil est conforme tJ Ia norme CNR-247 du Canada. L' utilisation de ce dispositif es t autonsee 3. VORSICHT I He npr.16nvr>Ka~Tecb K AaHHoro HJ.oeni1R 6nH:>Ke, '"e~.1 Ha 20 eM .
void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product seulement auxdeu x cond itionssuivan te s : (11 il nedoitpasproduiredebrouillage.et(2) 1'utilisateu r Zwischen dieses Produkts und Personen muss ein Schutzabstand von 20 em eingehalten werden . JanpeLLtaeTCA HCnOilbJQBaTb,!J.aHHl>lr:i npO.QYKT V!aHTeHHyC.o.pyr or:iaHTeHHO r:i 1-1/lH nepeAaTYVIKOM
4. CAUTION (for Bluetoothi Wi-Fi) du dispositif doit E!tre pre t a accepter tout brouillage radro91ectrique re~ u. meme si ce brou1llage est Dieses Prod ukt und seine Antenna dlirfen nicht neben anderen Antennen oder Sendern aufgestellt (POLSKI(
• To comply w rth FCC RF exposure compliance requrrement. separat1on d iStance ol at least 20 em suscepti ble de compromettre le fo nct1onnement du disposrt1 f . Ce t appareil numerique de Ia classe oder zusammen mit illnen verwendet werden
1. DEKLARACJA ZGODNOSCI
must be ma1ntained between th is product and all persons Best conforme a Ia norme NMB-003 du Canada (FRAN~AISI Nasze produkty zgodnie z postanowieniamr KE/ UE, tj.
• Th1s product and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction w ith any other 2. ATIENTION 1. DECLARATION DE CONFORMITE R&TIE Direc tiv e 1999/5/EC
antenna or transmitte r. Afin de rBduire le risque d'rnterie renceaux autres ut1lisateurs. il taut choisir le type d'antenne et son Nos produits sont conformes aux disposit1ons des direct1ves CE/UE comme su 1t , I 2. UWAGA: MODYFIKACJA TEGO URl.qOZENIA JEST ZABRONIONA
S. NOTE gain de fa~o n ace que Ia puissance isotrope rayonnee equ ivalente (p.i. r.e.l ne soit pas supeir 1eure R&TTE D1rect1ve 1999/5/EC 1 Po zainstalowaniu zgodnie z instrukcjami zawartymi w niniejszej instrukCJi obslugi urzadzenie to
This product has been tested and tou nd to comp ly with the lim 1ts for a Class B digital device. au niveau requis pour I' obtention d'une communication satisfaisante. 2 . MISE EN GARDE IMPORTANTE ; NE JAMAIS MODIFIER CE PRODUIT I bcdzie spelniaC wvmogi dyrektywy R& TIE. Wprowadzanie modyfikacji do tego urzadzenia moie
pursuant to Part 15 ot the FCC Ru les These l1mits are des1gned to prov1de reasonable protection (il las d 1spos1tifs fonct1onnant dans Ia bande 5 150 - 5 250 MHz sont rese rves uniquement pour S1 toutes les cons1gnes dans ce mode ont ete respectees pendant son installatron. I ;~u~~~~~~o;~~~~em niebezpiecznego promieniowania elektromagnetycznego oraz rad iowego
against harmful interference ina res1dent1al ins ta llation. une utihsat1on a l'in ten eur al1n de r€ldu1re les nsques de brou1llage prBJud:ciable aux systemes ce produ1t est conforme aux R&TTE. Toute modif1ca t1on du produit risqueralt a!ors de
Th1s produc t generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and. rf not installed and used desatellitesmobilesutilisantlesmemescanaux g9neire r des radiat ions radio et EMC da ngereuses Mi~dzy tego prod uktu i wsze lkimi osobam• mus1 byC zachowana odlegloSC przyna1mn1eJ 20 em
in accordance w ith the instructions. may cause harmful Interference to radio communications Iii) De plus. les utilisateurs devraient aussi etre avises que les utilisateurs de radars de haute I Urzqdzenia wraz z anten<j nie moi:na instalowaC w potCjczen1u z rnnCj an tena lub nadajnikiem.
3. ATIENTION
However, there 1s no guarantee tha t interference w1i l not occur in a particu lar installation. If th is puissance sont d9signes utilrsateurs prrncipaux tc.-11-d, qu'rls ont Ia priOfltE!I pou r les bandes 5 L'appareil devra etre situeie a une distance de 20 em au morns des personnes D&M Europe B.V.
product does cause harmfu l interference to radio or telev ision reception. which can be determined 250- 5 350 MHz et 5 650-5 850 MHz et que ces radars pourra 1ent causer du brourllage eVou Ce produ1t a1ns1 q ue son antenne ne devront en aucun cas etre uti l1 st!s a prox1mit8 d'une autre Beemdstraat11
by turning the product OFF and ON. the user IS encouraged to try to co rrect the rnterference by one des dommages aux disposit1fs LAN·EL
5653MAE 1ndhoven
or more of the following measures· For Canadian custom ers I Pour les clien ts canadiens: (ITALIANO( The Netherlands
• Reor ient or relocate the receiving antenna CAN ICES·3 !B) I NMB·3 (B)
• Increase the separat10n between the equ1pment and rece1ver 1. DICHIARAZIONE Dl CONFORMITA
"for indoor use only" I noslfl prodott<sono conform r a quanta prevrsto dalle diret11ve EC/EU. come spec1f1cato di segurto
• Connect the product into an outlet on a crrcu 1t different from that to whrch the receiver rs
connected. R&TIE Drrective 1999/5/EC
• Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of produc t or an experienced radio I :l RF Exposure Information 2. AVVERTENZA IMPORTANTE: NON MODIFICARE QUESTO PRODOTIO (ENGLISH(
TV technic ian l or help. Se installato come indicate nelle istruzion 1del presente manuale, questa prodo uo sodd1sfa i requis iti 5,150 - 5,350 MHz rs res tricted to 1ndoor use only
!~~r~~~~~ean~dc~:~~i=~h:i~hc~CC "1_1~r;~~:~i~; (~~o~~~~s~~~~~~~i~~~;~:t: i~o~~~P~n~~~~r~l~~ della d1rett1va R&TIE. Evenh.rali modif1che apportate al prodotto potrebbero causare perrcolose
(DEUTSCH(
rad1azioniradioedEMC
OET65 and RSS- 102 of the IC rad10 frequency (RF) Exposure rules . Th1s equipment has very low 5.150- 5.350 MHz darf nur rn geschlossenen Rciumen verwende t wer den
INFORMATION FCC (Pour Ia clientele 8tasunienne) levels of RF energy that are deemed to comp ly withou t test ing of specific absorption ratiO (SAR) 3. ATIENZIONE
1 E. necessarro mantenere una distanza m 1nima d1 20 em tra questa prodotto e le persone IFRAN~AIS(
1.1NFORMATIONS DE CONFORMITE Cet 8qu1pement est co nforme aux normes d'exposit1on aux radiat ions FCC / IC d€lfinies pour un
Ouesto prodotto e Ia relativa antenna non devono essere posizionatr in prossimitil d1 alt re antenne 5150 · 5 350 MHz est l1m1tea une utilisation en interreur un1quement
• Nom du produit: Ampli-Tuner Audio/Video Reseau env1ronnement non contr61ei et satisfait les directives d'exposrtion a Ia radiofreiquence (RFI dans
o trasmett1tori e non devono essere utrlizzati congiuntamen te a questi ult1mi
• Numero de modele: le supplement C des OET65 et RSS-102 des reigles d'exposition a Ia freiquence radio (RFJ IC. Cet (ITALIANO(
AVR-S720W I AVR-X1300W I AVR-S920W I AVR-X2300W I AVR-X3300W equipement a de tri:!s laibles niveau)( d'einergie RF qui sont juges conlormes sans test de taux (ESPANOL( La frequenza 5,150 - 5.350 MHz l!llim itata al solo usa interne
• CONTIENT MODULE EMETIEUR FCC ID: ZQO-CV920C d'absorpMn splic1f1que !SARI 1. DECLARACI6N DE CONFORMIDAD (ESPANOL(
Nuestros productos cumplen las d1sposiciones de las d irect ivas de Ia CE/UE siguientes 5,150 - 5,350 MHz esttr restrrng ido al usa en interiores solamente
Ce produit est conforme a Ia section 15 du reg lement FCC. L'utilisation est sujette aux deux
R&TTE D irective 1999/5/EC
conditions suivantes: (1) ce produi t ne provoque pas d'interterences nocives et (2) ce produit doit
2. NOTA IMPORTANTE: NO MODIFIOUE ESTE PRODUCTO INEDERLANDS(
accepter toute rnterference . y compris les interferences pouvant entrainer ui-1 fonct1onnernent non 5.150 - 5.350 MHz is beperkt tot aileen binnenshuis gebruik
souhaitable Este producto. si es instalado de acuerdo con las instrucciones conten rdas en este manual, cumple
los requis1tos de Ia dnect1va R&TIE_ La modif1cac iOn del producto puede producir rad1ac rOn de Rad ro (SVENSKA(
Denon Electronics (USAJ. LLC yEMCpehgrosa. 5150-5350MHziirbegriinsat til l inomhusbruk
(a D & M Holdrngs Company)
100 CorporatcDnve
3. PRECAUCI6N (PYCCKHH(
Se debe mantener una separacr6n deal menos 20 em del producto y las personas
Mahwah, NJ 07430-204 1 5150-5350 M r LI orpaHHYHBaeTCA lo1CnO/lb30BaH f.18M TO/lbKO e nO~eWeHV!H
Es te y su antena no debe instalarse ni util izarse conjuntamente con otra antena o
TeL (2011 762-6665
(POLSKI(
2. REMARQUE IMPORTANTE: NE PAS MODIFIER CE PRODUIT "'c""'"' 5 150 5 350 MHz to cz~stotliwoSC ograniczona do uiytkowan1a Jedynie w pom 1eszczenrach
(NEDERLANDS(
Ce produit, lorsqu'il est installe comme indiqu(! dans les instructions de ce manuel, est conforme
aux normes FCC. Les modifications qui ne sont pas expressement approuvees par Denon peuvent
1. EENVORMIGHEIDSVERKLARING
Onze producte n volgen de voorwaarden van de EG/EU-richtl i1nen zoals vo lgt;
annulerl'autonsat1on FCCautihserle produ 11.
R& TIE D1rect 1ve 1999/5/EC
3. 1MPORTANT (Pour reseau) 2. BELANGRIJKE MEDEDELING:
Lar s du branchement de ce produ1t a un routeur ou <'I un concentra teur reseau. n'ut1h sez qu'un cilble
STP ou ScTP LAN blinde (d1sponible chez un deta1llantJ
Su1vre toutes instructions d' 1nstallation . Dans le cas contraire. cela pourrait annuler l'autorisation
BRENG AAN DIT PRODUCT GEEN AANPASSINGEN AAN
D1t pro duct. indien gernstalleerd volgens de aanwiJzrngen rn deze gebrurksaanWIJZing, voldoet aan
de vereisten van de R&TIE-rrchtl iJn. Aanpass ing van drt product kan gevaarlijke rad:o - en EMC-
( E: <D R&TIE Directive 199915/ EC
Th is product may be operated rn the following countrres;
FCC a utihser ce t appare1l .
straling totgevolghebben
4. PRECAUTION (Pour Bluetoothi Wi-Fi) 3. LETOP AT BE cz DK Fl
• Af1n de repondre aux exrgences de conformite FCC sur l'expos1t1on aux RF, une distance d'au Houdtussenenpersonenaltljdeenafstandvantenminste20cmaan FR DE GR HU IE
mains 20 em doit etre maintenue entre cet appare il et toutes les personnes Dit product en z11n antenne mogen niet in de buurt van een andere antenne of zender worden IT NL PL PT SK
• Cet appareil ainsi que son antenne ne doivent pas se trouve r a prox1m1te Immediate, nr etre geplaatst of rn comb1nat1e daarmee wo rden gebru1kt. ES SE GB NO CH
utilises en assOCiation avec une autre antenne ou un autre emetteur.
5. NOTE
Ce produit a ete teste et 11est contorme aux limrtat1ons des dispos1t1fs numeriques de Class B, en
venu de Ia sect1on 15 du reglement FCC. Ces l1m ita t1ons sont cont;:ues pou r tournir une protection
raisonnable centre les interferences nocives sur une installation rt!s1dent1elle
Ce produit genera, utilise et emet de r energie de radiofr9quence et s'il n'est pas installe et
uttl1se conformement aux 1nstruct10ns, II peut entrainer des 1nterterences nefastes avec les
communications radio. Toutefois, nous ne pouvons pas garantir !'absence d'rnterfe rence avec
cena ines installa tions En cas d'interfere nces nefastes sur Ia reception de Ia rad1o ou de Ia te i8V1S1on
provoquees par eel appareil. survenant au moment de l'act1vation ON ou de Ia dr?sactivation OFF,
nous conseillons a l'utilisateur d'essayer de corrrger l'rnterf9rence comme suit
• ReonenteroudE!placer l'antenne.
• Augmenter Ia distance entre 1'9quipement et le r9cepteur .
• Connecter l'appareil a Ia prise murale d'un ci rcUit different de celui du recepteur
• Consulter un revendeu r local agree pour Ia distribution de ce type de prod uit ou un techn1cien
D&M Holdings Inc
rad io/TVexperimente
5431 10511 OOAD
~ KOREA
8H9 .!:f.~1i!l::ll ~ Bli~~~ 7 ~ -5-~0I
91.£9.£ <2J~~~.:i!.~ -E!-~.§ A-j t:IJ~-c ~-? gj@Li q.
D II$Jl1C:BIJT.Q~$:Ul B;;) 717 1 ( 7 f ~~ \','*~~!71Xf;<H )
:zt<~litll>58!$1:¥::J<I'P'll:'H~illzjj)(i<JL,tc'i'~:!J © !liiB!Jni:J; <). 5,150- 5.350MHz O)~)il';<;(tl:'llllit. Ol 7171~ 7 f ~~ (B;;)) tjXf:U:f?;j~717 1 £Ai 'f'£7f~Oi 1 Ai Af~;> f ~ ~~ ~?;j££ ;>foj , 2'EXIQ1011 Ai Af~~ 4' ~1 §'-lef.
7--:7lllt1lC~::Z7 Lo-0)!!\\~Foi!li:OOz P<Jio:L, n ' "'" o ill.P'JO)JJ.Cm~ll!<<":tlH '*9, OH@ .!jLt:j{~;p::!l~ g~% BlL~~{:J 7~~~01 ~1.2.££ ~~~t:j:il~ t!-~§ Ail::l l ~~ ~ =T B'tBL-Iq .
-
• :zt<~ztl:'lll90c~ l:l!\\~FoiO)i'<.i'flit01\'d5LJO:itfc, © :zt<~~lit . 2.4G Hz/ 5G Hz 0)~\'l!;<;(<iTO)!l[)B!z~ IJ ill l..,
•~TO)~czS~Q~c$•~~-ttstt0~cijasLJ ll'0~!*~. T <C~~(:'f)Jt-G. l'W~WhtcLJlt
0:9o l:tME'EL.,tc')9 0"Hle1'ib'®') 0:9,
• P<Jio:90 1J < ~:tJ7--:»lllt1':C~:>\7Lo-O)Ji\\l!ilroi!~ili!zJJ [ 2.4GHz/5GHzO)~£!;lc<iTztl:'lll L, n '03:'Q~~ l -
~ / Cl()l!;90~c · ~~v~v
·P'Jiol9~t~:!J7--:\1lll~:;:>\7lo-O).~Foi'll:OOC ·!!\\~ L A N HIJillL,tc~~ CJ- f-J\'.J:::J~. !1\\l!l! ilil-t=l!li
l!lCJT®0hl "!l5-" J vzlittl'9~c !IJ--:\1-. !1\\11! LAN JJIC AV ~~~~ ) ~.§!1J!ii'C81i\Ml15:11\2i!£Jtl$~'Wi~lil · m.§!8'fOJ · oJ:q] , illl!m§lliiEffl~~/f'l~liiii§!i;!l!''Wi$, 1JD::*:Jtl$§1\\i;!l!'IE\5l!3t 2!11H't&Jtl!J8'
· ~O)~~O)tl:'ffl~)BI;<;(~
(2 .4 GHz/5G Hz) lit. ~ TO) · :>\?- f- 7~~ / :::J- I-' v:>\ 7~ ~ ililH'll%
ct ~c•~~581;<ztl"t1Jm<"tt n '"' 9, • Blue1oo1h JJIC~!iil ii£Jtl:¥~1~~~m2iiEm;r:;~~f!'lffi~i19.'"i'&'flt15itlm0 : ~&~IJHHIIIJ!®>B1f · mmo1~m · m!c'l~~J!Hit81f:Ol~ll!lli!iiEffl,
· ~~v~V~O)£~·~~·~~m~~ ·'J-i'\'1/:>\J;ff,GAV~iSl il1ii&15Jt®0 · li'li;Y~0itffl!:E1'F~2!!M~~lm0 o
• Illil0)~*'5-i ~olTtl:'lll<"h H '0lHh1*~~~/llO) ii£JtJ$~~~~lil!&B:l'l:i55t®iilQQn< , M~&~~ffl~)Eii!iii~11'i$1il8l!iim2'f!ll: o
-
·'J-{'\'[/:>\:::J~f-0 - 5 -
II<P'll!\\llilroi Ci'<.i'fzl\'90!!\\llilroil • •w~wnt~LJltl:tv'~'EUcLJ~0lli\81:1it. H e
• to:if:IJ<~:!J!I\\llilroi (i'<.!'fH'IVJL '!!\\~Foil O):IJ5nNt!!!90DJim1'1b'3olJ0:9,
• 7'?7 "- :P!I\\i®Foi Ci'<.!'fzl\'9 0!!\\II!Foil 1. 'f)ifiG n '0~@®(:0) 11§ i!IIU!t9 o
·ilii~·i@Jiii[fjffl~ 2. 'f5iftG n '0~~0)!i!:JliztD0 o
• j;(~ v - ?1- '1'> GPS i!i!l1. '¥\iili!Jillii!t~O)'¥\ii~ © "\-::z.i-:IJ-~O)~~~~m<itoi.~!iilz.::::tl:'mO)Jli\8c
0 lf!Lll~til@lfiJ.li!~ (SRRC)
~m~ lit. t>~llillll1il:l<\~~J(-:IJ-O:t:litllli?H51:&i58!1:
• :eJ:JI\\,\'liliiiLi~m~ C ill:lOOv-?1-~l J; 0U!'z Cli~~O)J:CI~Ill< teN ,, ?lH.=*
1. ~O)~@®ztl:'lll90MI:. ili<~J: "oO)!I\\l!ilroiv'@lll 0 .ACJJ.O)cp~tl:'lllUclJ. ;<jc~O)Illii:<l'iili:::J~? ') - 1. • iiEffljiJi$: 2.4 ~ 2.4835GHz I. • I{'fjiij$JBGlJ; 5150 ~ 5350MHz I. • Ifl'~ili$JBGlJ: 5725 ~ 5850MHz
2"hH1tJL '~CzliMIL, T<t::N ' o f-O)ll!'i'>~WJc"O)~;!llM'®0c. Jal~1*!!Wii!\< • ~~~~'@~nJtJ$ (EIRPI : • ~~~~'@~jJtl$ (EIRPI : < 200mW • .:l;t~ltl$: < 500mW ~0 < 27dBm
2. l'ib'-. ;::O)~@®b'6HcO)l!\\.\'liFoiD;fL, T1l1!lfJ1J> Q<J>W~WhtcLJ. IIM><!J''!l:.'f.L,tc'J90;::cv'® 7':~l!l~< IOdBi 8'1: < 100mW §\\< 20dBm CD • ~::*:Jtl$iii&;J!l: : < 1OdBm I MHz • ~~~~'@~JtJ$ (EIRPI: < 2W ;ffi< 33dBm
58i'f5iJ;O)$~Jv~'EL,tcllil8Dit. iffi'l'>m:tl:'m~;B! LJ0:9o '!W~Whtc <) . lt '!W~'EUc')90l!Ji8 7':~j!j~;> 1OdBi 8'): < 500mW §\\< 27dBm (?J • li!t~j}jg~ : 20ppm · lrx::*:Jtl$iil~l!l: :
;<zz'l!!~90b'. Hclitfll:iB!O)~§'Jz Ji!ll:L,tcJ:. T l:lit. "JalGO)Bl_L,lJi\pfil:'ll:il!i'Gil!i'L, T<te<"C> , • 1Ji'9 f.:l;t~jltJ$ (EIRPI : < -80dBm I Hz
• ~:t:Jtl$iil&:l!l: : < 13dBm I MHdO< 19dBm I MHz (EIRPI
<cjlilli)I;C:::;a;*l!L >tete~. 5!E~@i!!Mtcit>O)li!l~~ 0 'll:i!!'O)il§i!fl'\'>~;!l'!W;I)'tJL 'llil;';~t,. ~58!0)&§'1~1:
7':~l!l~ < 1OdBi 8'1 : < 20dBm I MHz (EIRPI CD • ~ll)(.:!;t~j ( '@~j I Jtl$ : • li!t~g~ : 20ppm
c:x 'c.::::i!l~L, T<teN'o J::l)~Fa1f"'S*<L 11.:J'tJL i!~-§1J"®L) ~9 o JfO)i~(5
3. 'fO)ftE. ;::O)~!iilb'6HcO)l!\\l!iiFoiD1L, T'il;!>Q~ t:lit:zt<~O)IoJ~'~'>ili:iE!z'l!iot0c~ll¥90;::cv'®LJ
7':~i!l~> 10dBi 8'): < 27dBm I MHz (EIRPI (?J < -36dBm I I OOkHz (30 ~ 1OOOMHzl • 1Ji'9 f.:l;t~jJtl$ (EIRPI :
5Bi'fiifiO)lJ> 19W~.'EGt:lll8Qc'.
15Jil'Si!JLJO);::c 0:9, • li!t~g~ : 20ppm < -54dBm I I OOkHz (48.5 ~ 72.5MHz, < -80dBm I Hz ( < 5725MHz §\\> 5850MHzl
m<~tcc~l:lit. ;)<O)JI1'117t"-SI!IlL 'Bto-tt<te<" © 5 V:t'\'>7' vi::'. BS/ CS r "- -7-Q (:"O)!;i)BIHIJ/ll • 9f.:l<~Jtl$ ( tt 2.4 ~ 2.4835GHz ~l11J.9f I 76 - IISMHz, 167 ~ 223MHz, 4 70 ~ 798MHzl • ~liY.:~<~ r '@~ 1 w~,
L>o uc~~oYtlif~tl:'mcr0c. !-i7z~'E90~c < -80dBm I Hz (EIRPI < -40dBm I I MHz (2400 ~ 2483.5MHzl < -36dBm I I OOkHz (30 ~ 1OOOMHzl
Jl*ll)t b' ®LJ0:9o 'f0)1Ji\81:1it~~;/)'6~<"'1fT'll:fil!L, l • ~liY.:l<~j i '@M I Jtl$ i x;Jiill.!i!t)Ei ± 2.5 i§lcli~l\!!i' < -33dBm I 1OOKHz (5150 ~ 5350MHzl < -40dBm I 1MHz (2400 ~ 2483.5MHzl
l*zti"itt 7 ..,- -:P~ I-' Ilo-;J;-JIJ'T..,-~Q'::z <t.C<"L'o :ffiL::!.9f I: < -40dBm I 1MHz (5470- 5850MHzl < - 40dBm I 1MHz (3400 - 3530MHz)
7/ ~S~.a<i!l!~-t~-:\1- o *~tititlii!llll15ll:~llezl1im!L, Td$'J 0:9v'. l!EO:oeb' < - 36dBm I I OOkHz (30 ~ I OOOMHzl < -30dBm I I MHz ( Jl:'8 I ~ 40GHzl < - 33dBm I I OOkHz (5725 ~ 5850MHzl
0570 (666) 112 o?~Uclit~?.t\l:~t~9 0 DJ!m1'1b'® LJ o: ~ o < - 33dBm I I OOkHz (2.4 ~ 2.4835GHzl 0 !ltFBfiix~ri±~r-"lilEffl . L::J.~iE.UIT 5150 ~ r ;±: x;J@!i'<)Ei 2.5 1§1Eiiil'lli'll1U.9f I
h1ro:/ / denon.jp/ jp/ h1m l/ con1act.h1m l © :zt<~(it~~pg~O)lif~, ill!i§li"'O)~'E~§B'JI:L,tc
< - 40dBm I I MHz (3.4 ~ 3.53GHzl 5350MHz ~$~~'fl!t o <:: - 30dBm I 1MHz ( Jl:'8 I ~ 40GHzl
;Ji-AI~-:\1-7'-i.i~f-0/:>\'Tlo-~9, ft!lO)!j!ilji, < -40dBm I I MHz (5.725 ~ 5.85GHzl
§B'J~O)tl:'llllitd$'\'>lib<t::<"L 'o
< - 30dBm 11 MHz ( Jl:'8 I - 12.75GHzl
2. /f'l~lili§l!'c'l.:l<~~$, 1JO:t:a~1Jtl$ ( §1<5~9 f1JDi5iMjjjjJtJ$m:t:g§ I, 1'l~li§9Hl:'7':~§1\c'lfflJl:'8&~7':~:
3. ilEfflBHi~x1&t<P15it8\J7t~.gi!j{[jj]:;%f"'i'l'l~Hlt; -§.:l<IR'I'l'fltiR®>B;J, lill.:ll§Pi~J.tiiEffl, t1'*&9!llffiiJ)~'*'fltFo:ODJ!Il!~ilEffl;
~~~0~1 2.4 FH 1 4. ilEfflii&Jtl$7t~.gm~, &\!Yi i'J:l'l:&f<tl7t~.g ill'.;%8\Hift§I\Iill'., f4~:&~131ill.fflil1@8~'@~Hit;

5. /f'j~i±(,fJL;f{JtflJ0~ji[[{iEilJ o
2.4 2.4GHz ;;;z~lll9 0!!\\~'~lliH<G0:9 o

DS/OF/ FH 'l!!Oil1J'itz~L, 0: 9 ,
4/ 1 ~!OJJi*llil~~~iEO)IIIiP'll!\\~~cl<tG Tt!l:iE<"h0"'f5ifi~e:llz"'L,*9Cli'l: ~;r<~x 10m),
2.4GHz /ilO)::'f:<iT~~tl:'lll L,,
b'-:>~!OJJi*~~IJl<'illiO)/il~ziQllli!DJileNS0~c zi~;<ltL,0:9 ,
2.4GHz ~O)::E;;;~ztl:'l'll L,. v'-:>mthi*~~IJ l<'il!!O);;;~HIQJ lli!l"DJile ~®0;::czill.otL,0:9 o
IEEE802.11 b/ g/n/a/ ac l<t!CGn '0!1\\llil LAN >l!lil~Ji<L,0:9 o

~ l<t!CGH '0 5GHz !1\\l!l! LAN ~)Jll;<;(1ilzlliG0: 9 o
E l<t!CGn >fJL' 5GHz !!\\II! LAN ~5BI;lc1ilzl!<L,0:9 o
DENON
www .denon .com
DENON
Congratulations on purchasing this Denon product!
We invite you to join the Denon Owner's Club.
Thank yo u for choosing Denon.

Be the first to know about upcoming Denon products and get exclusive
previews of new technologies. You will also receive members only offers from
our online store and be the first in line for all promotions and contests.
http://usa .de non .com/us/MyAccount/Pages/Login .aspx
Join today!
Please register your product at,
USA Customers : http://usa.denon.com/us/Support/Pages/ProductRegistration.aspx

Canada Customers : http://ca.denon.com/CA/Support/Pages/ProductRegistration.aspx
Denon Factory Service Information
USA
DENON FACTORY SERVICE by PANURGY OEM

701 Ford Road (South Dock)
Rockaway, NJ 07866-2053
(973) 625-4056
(973) 625-9489 Fax
http://www.panurgyoem.com/Denon/Denonrepair.html
To locate an authorized warranty service center within your area please visit our web site at
http://usa.denon.com/us/Support/Pages/ServiceCenterSearch.aspx
CANADA
DENON FACTORY SERVICE by MICROLANDTECHNICAL SERVICES
170 Alden Road, Unit 2
Markham, ON L3R4C1
(905) 940-1982
http://cl ie ntporta I.micro Ian d .ca/rmasta rt.aspx
To locate an authorized warranty service center within your area please visit our web site at
http://ca. de non .com/CA/Su pport/Pages/Serv iceCenterSea rch .aspx.
WARRANTY DE COM MON

5431 10003 50AD
VQE1A224N
1
t
. . .. •illl•·~·•illl•·4'>·•1111'·41-·•llll•·. . .·•llll•·. . .·•llll•·. . .·•lll1•·. . .·•1111'·. . .·•1111•·....·•1111•·. . .·•1111'·. . .·•1111•·4>-·•llll•·. . .·•llllo. . . ..,,lfi'·....·ollll•·. . .·•llllo.. . .. ,,lll•~·lll1o. . . ..,,lll•·....·•llil•· . . .·•llll1·. . . .,111•·....·•1lll•·. . .·•l llh·. . .·ollll•· . . .·•lllh·. . .·•llll•·. . . ·•llll•·. . .·•llll •·. . . ·•llll,.. . . . ,,llh
DENON
This warranty will be honored only in the U.S.A.
Jt •
t4
LIMITED WARRANTY
Length of Non·Transferable Warranty
This warranty on your DEN ON product which is distributed and warranted by DEN ON ELECTRONICS (USA), LLC remains in effect for the following periods from
the date of the original consumer purchase from an AUTHORIZED DENON ELECTRONICS (USA), LLC DEALER.
Product Category
A /V Controller, A /V Receiver, AM I FM Receiver AVC, AVR, ORA 2
Special Cl and IN-Command series TM AV Receivers AVR-.... CI. AVR-X.... 3
DVD Receiver, DVD Home Theater System ADV. S 1
Pre-Amplifier, D1gital Pre-Amplifier
PRA, AVP. DAP, POA, HA 3
Power-Amplifier. Head Amplifier
Tuner, Integrated Amplifier TU, PMA 3
Option Board ACD 3
CD Player, DVD Player, Blu-ray D1sc Player DCD, DCM, DVD. DVM, DBR DBT 1
1 CD Recorder CDRW 1
I CD Receiver, Network CD Receiver. Network Receiver RCD, DRA-N 1
Network Audio Player DNP 2 YEAR lSI
System Audio D-F. D-M. S 1
Turntable I 1 I Autolift I Manual DP-L. DP-M 4

2 Full Automatic DP-F. DP-USB 2
Speaker sc 5
Sub-woofer DSW 1
M icrophone DM-S, DM-A 2
iPhone<El I iPod<El Docks AS D, DSD 1
Headphone AH 1
Front Surround Home Theater System DHT-FS 1 i
Video Processor DVP 3 i
Cartridge DL 90 i
I
Remote Controller RC 90
Cables AK 90
DAYS I
I
Speaker stands ASF 90 !
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., regislered in the U.S. and 01her coumries.
What is Covered
Except as specified below, this Warranty covers all defects in material and workmanship in this product occurring during the above warranty periods. The following are
not covered by the Warranty: (I) Any product which is not distributed in the U.S.A. by DENON ELECTRONICS (USA), LLC. (2) Any product which is not purchased in
the U.S.A. from an authorized DENON dealer. (Note: AUTHORIZED DENON DEALERS can be identified by DEN ON AUTHORIZED DEALER sticker displayed in
the stores. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer is a DENON AUTHORIZED DEALER, please contact DENON as listed below). (3) Any product on which the serial
number has been defaced, modifi ed or removed. (4) Damaged deterioration or malfunction resulting from: a) Accident, act of nature, abuse, misuse, neglect, unauthorized
product repair, opening of or modification or failure to follow instructions supplied with the product. b) Repair or attempted repair by anyone not authorized by DENON.
c) Any shipment of the product (claim must be presented to carrier). (5) Items subject to wear from normal usage (tape heads, cartridges, stylus, battery, etc.). (6)
Periodic check-ups which do not disclose any defect. (7) Use of the product outside the U.S.A. (8) Damaged magnetic tape or CD/DVD/BD discs. (9) Use in industrial,
commercial, and/or professional applications. (1 0) Any installation or removal charges resulting from product failure.
What We Will Pay For
If during the applicable warranty period from the date of original consumer purchase your DENON product is found to be defective by DENON, DENON will
repair, or at its option, replace with new, reconditioned or equivalent model, such defective product without charge for parts or labor.
How to Obtain Warranty Performance
If your unit ever needs service, it may be taken or shipped to any authorized DENON service station or DENON ELECTRONICS (if you are uncertain as to whether
a service station is DENON authorized, please visit our website at http://usa.denon.com/us/Support/Pagcs/ScrviccCenterSearch.aspx or contact DENON as listed
below.) In all other cases, the following procedures apply whenever your unit must be transported for warranty service;
a. You are responsible for transporting your unit or arranging for ils transportation.
b. If shipment of your unit is required;
You must pay the initial shipping charges, but we will pay the return shipping charges if the repairs are covered by the Warranty.
c. WHEN RETURNING YOUR UNIT FOR WARRANTY SERVICE. A COPY OF THE ORIGINAL SALES SLIP MUST BE ATTACHED.
d. You should include the following: yo ur name, address, daytime telephone number, model and serial number of the product and a description of the problem.
In the case of a CD/DVD/BD Player, please enclose ONE (I) disc that the unit has failed with for test reasons. II will be returned with the unit.
THIS WARRANTY IS VALID TN THE U.S.A. ONLY.
If your product does not require service, but you have questions regarding its operation, please contact our Customer Support Department as listed below.
THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY MADE TN LIE U OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
OUR LIABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT, AT OUR OPTION, OF ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT AND S HALL IN NO EVENT
INCLUDE INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL COMMERCIAL OR PROPERTY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND. WE ARE NOT RESPONS IBLE FOR
PRODUCTS LOST, STOLEN AND/OR DAMAGED DURING SHIPPING.
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS AND/OR DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, but you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This Warranty may not be altered other than in a
writing signed by an officer of Denon Electronics USA, LLC.
DENON ELECTRONICS (USA). LLC DENON FACTORY SERVICE by PANURGY OEM

(a D&M Holdings Company) 701 Ford Road (South Dock)
100 Corporate Drive Rockaway, NJ 07866-2053
t Mahwah, NJ 07430-2041
(201) 762-6665
(973) 625-4056
(973) 625-9489 Fax
t www.usa.denon.com http://www.panurgyoem.com/Denon/Denonrepair.html 4
· ·llll•·. - .·•lill•·....·•l lll•·.....·ollll•·....·•llil'·....·•illl•·....·•lll"· ....·•llll•·....·•llll•......,llll•·....·•ltii'·.....·•IIII •·.....·•III"·.....·•IIII•·.....·•III' •·....·•IIII•·.....·•IIII•·. . .·•IIII•·....•III"·. . .·•IIII•·.....·•IIII'·....·•IIII•·....·•IIII•......,,IJio.......,,ltl•·....·•llll •.....,,lll•......,llfl• ....·oiii"·. . .·•IIII•·....·•I III•·....·•IIII•.J
2
LIMITED WARRANTY •
Length of Non-Transferable Warranty
This warranty on your DENON product which is distributed and warranted by D&M CANADA INC. remains in effect for the following periods from the date of the •
original consumer purchase from an AUTHORIZED D&M CANADA INC. DEALER.
Product Category •
I A IV Controller, A IV Receiver. AM I FM
Special Cl and IN-Command series
DVD Rece1ver. DVD Home Theater System
TM
Rece1ver
AV Receivers
AVC.AVR. ORA
AVR-.... CI, AVA-X""
ADV, S
2
3
1
'•
'•
Pre-Amplif1er, Digital Pre-Amplif ier
Powe Amplifier, Head Amplif ie r
PRA,AVP,DAP, POA.HA 3
Tuner, Integrated A mplifier TU, PMA 3
Opt1on Board ACD 3
CD Player, DVD Player, Blu ray Disc Player DCD, DCM, DVD, DVM, DBP DBT
'•
1
CD Recorder CDRW 1
CD Receiver, Network CD Rec eiver, Network Receiver RCD, DRA-N 1
Network Audio Player DNP 2 YEAR IS)
System Aud10 D-F, D-M, S 1
Turntable
Speaker
Sub-woofer
I 1
2
I Autolift I M anual
Full Automatic
DP-L. DP-M
DP-F, DP-USB
sc
DSW
4
2
5
1
'
~
Microphone
iPhone"" I 1Pod"" Docks
Headphone
Front Surround Home Theater System
DM-S, DM-A
ASD,DSD
AH
DHT-FS
2
1
1
1
'•
Video Processor
Cartridge
DVP
DL
3
90 •
'i
Remote Controller RC 90
DAYS
• Cables
Speaker stands
AK
ASF
90
90
•
• What is Covered
iPod is a tradem ark of Apple Inc., reg1stered in the U.S. and other countries.
• Except as specified below, this Warranty covers all defects in material and workmanship in this product occurring during the above warranty periods. The following
•
~
t
are not covered by the Warranty: (l) Any product which is not distributed in Canada by D&M CANADA INC. (2) Any product which is not purchased in Canada
from an authorized DENON dealer. (Note: AUTHORIZED DENON DEALERS can be identified by DENON AUTHORIZED DEALER sticker displayed in the
stores. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer is a DEN ON AUTHORIZED DEALER, please contact D&M CANADA INC. as listed below). (3) Any product on
which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed. (4) Damaged deterioration or malfunction resulting from: a) Accident, act of nature, abuse, misuse,
neglect, unauthorized product repair, opening of or modification or failure to follow instructions supplied with the product. b) Repair or attempted repair by anyone
';•
t
'•
not authorized by DENON. c) Any shipment of the product (claim must be presented to carrier). (5) Items subject to wear from normal usage (tape heads, cartridges,
stylus, battery, etc.). (6) Periodic check-ups which do not disclose any defect. (7) Use of the product outside Canada. (8) Damaged magnetic tape or CD/DVD/BD
t discs. (9) Use in industrial, commercial, and/or professional applications. (10) Any installation or removal charges resulting from product failure.
• What We Will Pay For

If during the applicable warranty period from the date of original consumer purchase your DEN ON product is found to be defective by DENON, DEN ON will
t
• repair, or at its option, replace with new, reconditioned or equivalent model, such defective product without charge for parts or labor.
How to Obtain Warranty Performance •
If your unit ever needs service, it may be ta ken or shipped to any authorized DEN ON service station or D&M CANADA INC. (For an authori zed DENON service
station ncar you, please check our website http://ca.denon.com/CA/SupportJPages/ServiceCenterSearch.aspx or contact D&M CANADA INC. as listed below.) In all
other cases, the following procedures apply whenever your unit must be transported for warranty service; '•
a. You arc responsible for transporting your unit or arranging for its transportation.
b. If shipment of your unit is required; •
You must pay the initial shipping charges, but we will pay the return shipping charges if the repairs are covered by the Warranty.
c. WHEN RETURNING YOUR UNIT FOR WARRANTY SERVICE. A COPY OF THE ORIGINAL SALES SLIP MUST BE ATTACHED. •
d. You should include the following: your name, address, daytime telephone number, model and serial number of the product and a description of the problem .
In the case of a CD/DVD/BD Player, please enclose ONE (I) disc that the unit has failed with for test reasons. It will be returned with the unit. •
THIS WARRANTY IS VALID IN CANADA ONLY.
If your product does not require service, but you have questions regarding its operation, please contact our Customer Support Department as listed below.
•
THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
OUR LIABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT, AT OUR OPTION, OF ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT AND SHALL IN NO EVENT
INCLUDE INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL C OMMERCIAL OR PROPERTY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND. WE ARE NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR
PRODUCTS LOST, STOLEN AND/OR DAMAGED DURING SHIPPING.
SOME PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS AND/OR DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, but you may also have other rights which vary from province to province. This Warranty may not be altered other than
in a writing signed by an officer of D&M Canada Inc.
D&M CANADA INC. DENON FACTORY SERVICE

10462 Islington Avenue, Unit 88 by MICROLAND TECHNICAL SERVICES
Kleinburg,Ontario LOJ 1CO 170 Alden Road, Unit 2
(905) 475-4085 Markham, ON L3R 4C1 t
t www.ca.denon.com (905) 940-1982 '
• http://cl ientporta I. m icrola nd.ca/rmastart.aspx ~
...,...,u•··•··•U~<·•··•IIh..,. .,,u~o..,...,,ll"·•··•ll"·,..·ull•·· ..,.·••ll'· •··•llh .,..,,u~o ...,..ull''·..,.·••ll'•·...·••ll"·..,...,ll"·•··•ll"·•·••ll"· ,..·ull''· .,..·••ll'•·..,.·ull"·•··•ll"·,...·••ll"·.,_·,,u~o.....,,u....,.._.,ll~>·...··•ll••·•··•ll''·•··•ll1'·41-·••111'·...,.··•1110·.,_··•11''·'*··•111'·.,.,.
,,n~o
3
r ·· ···.... ...· · ··-................ . ......................... .......... . ..... ......... . ...... ................u........................................................................................................................ ...................................................................,
······· -~····· ··· ~~ ~~
4 Cette gara ntie ne sera ho noree qu ' a u Canada. ~
t
t
DENON® i'
t GARANTIE LIMITEE
~
Duree du garantie non-transferable
La garantie de votre produit DENON, distri bue ct garanti par D&M CANADA INC. prend cffet a panir de Ia date d' achat du consommate ur original aupre s d ' un
revcndeur official D&M CANADA INC. pendant les periodes suivantes.
Categoric de produit
Contr61eur A IV, Recepteu A I V, Recepteu r AM I FM AVC, AVR, DRA 2
R8cepteurs AV Cl et IN-Command series TM sp9ciaux AVR·""CI. AVR-X " " 3
Recepteur DVD, Syst eme DVD Home Theater ADV, S 1
Preamplificateur, pr€amplif icateur num€rique
PRA. AVP. DA P. POA. HA 3
Amplificateur de puissance. Preamplificateur phone
Syntoniseur, amplificateur int€gre TU, PMA 3
Carte optionnelle ACD 3
Lecteur CD, Lecteur DVD, Lect eur Disque Blu-ray DCD. DCM, DVD, DVM , DBP, DBT 1
Enregistreur CD CDRW 1
Ampri-tuner avec Lecteur de CD, 1
RCD, DRA-N
RScepteur aud10 I CD avec reseau integre I Chaine audio avec reseau mtegre
ANN EES
Lecteur Audio RE!seau DNP 2
Systeme Audio D-F, D-M , S 1
Table tournante
I 1 Levee aut o DP-L, DP-M 4
2 Auto complet DP-F, DP-USB 2
Haut-parleurs sc 5
Sub-woofer DSW 1
M icro DM-S. DM·A 2
iPhone® I iPod® Docks ASD.DSD 1
Casque d 'ecoute AH 1
Avant Surro und Syst eme Home Theat er DHT-FS 1
Processeur video DVP 3
Cellule phonolectrice DL 90
Telecom mande RC 90 JOURS
Cable AK 90
Support pour enceinte acoustique ASF 90
Apple et 1Pod sont des marques com merciales d:A.pple Inc .. dE!posees aux Etats·Unis et dans d'autres pays
Couverture
Cette garantic couvrc to us les defauts de materiel ou de fabrication du produit, aI' exception de ceux indiques ci-apres qui conforrment scion les termes durant Ia peri ode
de Ia garantie. Ne soot pas couverts par la garantie: (1) Tout produit qui n'est pas distribue au Canada par D&M CANADA INC. (2) Tout produit qui n'a pas ere achete au
Canada aupres d'un revendeur officiel DENON (Note: On peut identifier les revendeurs officiels DENON par leur auto-coli ant "REVENDEUR OFF!C!EL DENON" affiche
dans leur magasin. Si vous doutez qu' un revendeur soit officiellement reconnu, contactez D&M CANADA INC. a l'adresse ci-dessous.) (3) Tout produit dont le numero
de serie a ete efface, modifie ou enleve. (4) Dommages dus a Ia deterioration ou a un fonctionnement ctefectueux a Ia suite de: a) accident, acte de Ia nature, abus, utilisation
impropre, negligence, reparation au moyen d' un produit non autorise, debale, modification, emploi comraire aux instructions fournies avec le produit, b) reparation ou
tentative de reparation par quelqu' un non reconnu par DENON. c) tout envoi du produit (Ia reclamation doit etre presentee au transporteur), (5) Articles sujets a deterioration
par !' usage (tetes de magnetophone, cellules phono, pointes de lecture phono, piles, etc.). (6) verification periodique qui ne revele aucun defaut. (7) Utilisation du produit hors
du Canada. (8) Bandes magnetiques, disques CD/DVD/BD endommages. (9) Utilisation commerciale, industrielle ou professionnelle. (1 0) Toutes charges d'installation ou de
deplacement resultant d ' un defaut du produit.
Notre p aiement
Si votre produit DENON est reconnu defectueux par DEN ON durant Ia periode d'application de Ia garantie apres Ia date d' achat du consommateur, DENON reparera
ou, a son choix, remplaccra avec un modele neuf, usage ou equivalent ce produit defectueux sans frais de pieces ni de main d' reuvre.
Application de Ia garantie
Si votre appareil necessite une verification ou une reparation, il peut etre apporte ou envoye atout atelier de service autorise DENON ou directement chez D&M CANADA
INC. (Pour trouver I' atelier autorise le plus pres, priere de verifier sur le site Internet de DENON au http:/lca.denon.com/CA/S upport/Pages/ServiceCenterSearch.aspx ou bien
contactez D&M Canada Inc aux coordonnes indiquees ci bas).
Dans tous les autres cas, les procedures suivantes s' appliquent si votre appareil doit etre envoye pour une verification ou une reparation sous garantie.
a. Vous etes responsable du transport de votre article ou vous devez vous arranger vous-meme pour son transport.
b. Si votre anicle doit etre envoye, vous devez payer les fra is d' envoi initiaux, mais nous payerons les frais de retour si Ia garantie couvre les reparations.
c. LORSOUE VOUS RENVOYEZ VafRE ARTICLE POUR UN SERVICE SOUS GARANTIE. VOUS DEVEZ JOINDRE UNE COPIE DE LA FACT URE
D' ACHAT D'OR!GINE.
d. Vous devez inclure egaleme nt vos nom, adresse, numero de telephone de jour, numeros de modele et de serie du produit et une description du probleme.
Dans le cas d' un lecteur CD/DVD/BD, joindre un disque que l' appareil n' a pu lire pour test. II vous sera retourne avec l'article.
CETTE GARANTIE EST VALABLE SEULMENT AU CANADA.
Si votre produit ne requiert aucun serv ice rna is que vous avez des questions quant a son fonctionncment, contactez notre depanement service clientele dont I' adresse
fi gure ci-dessous.
CETTE GARANTIE EST EXPRESSEMENT FAITE EN LIEU ET PLACE DE TOUTES LES AUTRES GARANTIES EXPRIMEES OU SOUS-ENTENDUES' Y COMPRIS,
SANS SE LIMITER A CELLES-CI, LES GARANTIES MARCHANDES ET SPECIFIQUES POUR UN USAGE PART! CULlER.
NOTRE RESPONSABILITE SE LIM ITE A LA REPARATION OU AU REM PLACEMENT, A NOTRE CHOIX, DE TOUT PRODUIT DEFECTUEUX ET N' INCLUT EN
AUCUN CAS DES DOMMAGES FORTUITS, COMMERCIAUX INDIRECTS Nl MATERIELS D' AUCUNE SORTE. NOUS NOUS SOMMES PAS RESPONSABLES
POUR LA PERTE DE LES PRODUITS ET/OU LES MARCHANDIS ES ENDOMMAGEES PENDANT LE TRNASPORT DES BIENS.
CERTAINES PROVINCES NE PERMETIENT PAS DE LIMITES QUANT A LA DUREE D'UNE GARANTIE SOUS-ENTENDUE ET/OU NE PERMETTENT PAS
L'EXCLUSION DE DOMMAGES FORTUITS. LES LIMITATIONS ET EXCLUSIONS MENT!ONNEES PLUS HAUT PEUVENT NE PASS' APPLIQUER A VOTRE CAS.
t Cette garantie vous donne des droits legaux specifiques, mais il se pourrait que vous aycz d ' autres dro its qui varient d ' une province
etre mod ifiee que par un document signe par un gestionnaire autorise de D&M Canada.
a I' autre. La garantie ne peut
t D&M CANADA INC.

10462 Islington Avenue, Unit 88
DENON FACTORY SERVICE
by MICROLANDTECHNICAL SERVICES
• Kleinburg, Ontario LOJ 1CO 170Aiden Road, Unit 2
~ (905) 475-4085 Markham, ON L3R 4C1
~ www.ca.denon.com (905) 940-1982
•
•lllh·....·•lil1'·• ·•111i'·. .·•Hl'' ·....·•lll''" • ·•illh·....·•lll'•·....·•illl•·....·••tl~>·•·•l il"·....·•lii1'·....·•1III•·•
http://clientportal.microland. ca/rmastart. aspx t
·•IJII'·....·•III"·....·•III " ·....·••II'•·....·••II''" .....,,III• ......ullh.......,,llh ....... ,,llt•.....·,lll' '·....·••llh.......ull'•·.....·•l ll''·.....·•lll' •·.....·•tllh· ....·••llh·.....·•lll••·..... ·••ll''· ....·•lll' •·.....·•lllh·. . .

Denon AVR X1300W Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Denon AVR X1300W Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Denon AVR X1300W Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

Front panel Display Rear panel 1 Remote Index

Accessories 7 Connecting a playback device 51

Front panel Display Rear panel 2 Remote Index

Playing an iPod 66 Listening to Internet Radio 87

Front panel Display Rear panel 3 Remote Index

AirPlay function 105 Selecting a sound mode 119

Front panel Display Rear panel 4 Remote Index

Settings Inputs 170

Front panel Display Rear panel 5 Remote Index

Network 196 Tips

Front panel Display Rear panel 6 Remote Index

Thank you for purchasing this Denon product.

Remote control unit R03/AAA batteries

Front panel Display Rear panel 7 Remote Index

Inserting the batteries NOTE

Operating range of the remote control

Front panel Display Rear panel 9 Remote Index

Front panel Display Rear panel 10 Remote Index

Front panel Display Rear panel 11 Remote Index

0 Multi-Room audio (v p. 118)

Front panel Display Rear panel 12 Remote Index

Part names and functions

Front panel Display Rear panel 13 Remote Index

qw e r t y C SOURCE SELECT knob

Front panel Display Rear panel 14 Remote Index

Front panel Display Rear panel 15 Remote Index

Front panel Display Rear panel 16 Remote Index

Front panel Display Rear panel 17 Remote Index

Front panel Display Rear panel 18 Remote Index

0 The antenna clip can be removed from the rear panel.

B PRE OUT connectors

G Video connectors (VIDEO)

Front panel Display Rear panel 20 Remote Index

Remote control unit

This displays the status information on the TV screen. (v p. 212)

y G Cursor buttons (uio p)

Front panel Display Rear panel 21 Remote Index

L Remote control signal transmitter

This transmits signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 8)

Front panel Display Rear panel 22 Remote Index

P Channel select buttons (CHANNEL +, –)

Front panel Display Rear panel 23 Remote Index

o Contents o Cables used for connections

Connecting an FM/AM antenna 57

Front panel Display Rear panel 25 Remote Index

Place the FRONT HEIGHT left and right speakers

About Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

Front panel Display Rear panel 27 Remote Index

Height speakers layout

Top middle speaker TML TMR

Front panel Display Rear panel 29 Remote Index

n Height speaker layout example TML TMR

n Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker layout example

Speaker connection NOTE

Front panel Display Rear panel 32 Remote Index

o Connecting the speaker cables o Connecting the subwoofer

o About the cable label (supplied) for channel Speaker Color

Front panel Display Rear panel 34 Remote Index

Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings